You are on page 1of 278

OPT9608

Version 8.4

Installation and Maintenance Manual


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual
V8.4
Catalog No: X92860
Drawing No: 497016-2301-143-A00
May 2018
Rev01

ECI's NPT-1800, NPT-1300, NPT-1200, NPT-1050, NPT-1025, NPT-1021, NPT-1020, NPT-1011,


and NPT-1010 are CE2.0 certified/compliant.

ECI's qualification lab is accredited by A2LA for competence in electrical testing according to
the International Standard ISO IEC 17025-2005 General Requirements for the Competence of
Testing and Calibration Laboratories.

ECI's management applications run on VMWare virtualization hypervisors.

© Copyright by ECI, 2012-2018. All rights reserved worldwide.


This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Ltd. (“ECI”). BY OPENING THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE
AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER
CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM.
All documentation and/or disk and all information and/or data contained in the documentation and/or disk ["ECI's Proprietary"] is ECI's proprietary
and is subject to all copyright, patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, and any international treaty provisions, as well as any specific
agreement protecting ECI's rights in the aforesaid information. Any use of ECI's Proprietary for any purposes [included but not limited: published,
reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part] other than those for which it was disclosed, without the express prior written permission
of ECI, is strictly forbidden.
ECI's Proprietary is provided "AS IS" and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No responsibility and or liability whatsoever are assumed
by ECI for you or any other party, for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, nor for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever caused,
arising directly or indirectly in connection with ECI's Proprietary, which may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof. ECI
reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications including any change in and to the ECI's
Proprietary.
Any representation(s) in ECI's Proprietary concerning performance of ECI's product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of
product performance or otherwise, either express or implied. No warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically
undertaken in ECI's sales contract or order confirmation. ECI's Proprietary is periodically updated, and changes will be incorporated in subsequent
editions. All graphics included in this document are for illustrative purposes only and might not correspond with your specific product version.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI and is protected by all relevant copyright, patent, and other
applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other
copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of ECI's Proprietary, as applicable.
YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise in respect of ECI's Proprietary contained therein, howsoever caused, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions (when provided by ECI) and
that such instructions were understood by them. ECI shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever
caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failure to fulfill in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines"
instructions.
Contents
Useful information ..................................................................................................x
Related documents ................................................................................................................................ x
Contact information ............................................................................................................................... x
Revision history ...................................................................................................................................... x

1 Apollo OPT96xx product line ....................................................................... 1-1

2 Installation safety guidelines ....................................................................... 2-1


2.1 Warning definition ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Qualified personnel warning ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 Installation warning ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4 General safety requirements ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.5 Jewelry removal warning ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.6 Grounding requirements ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.6.1 Rack grounding requirements ................................................................................................. 2-3
2.6.2 Equipment grounding requirements ....................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.3 Grounding requirements for NEBS compliance ...................................................................... 2-5
2.7 Power supply requirements................................................................................................... 2-5
2.7.1 Connection via RAP ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.7.2 Connection via user-provided power distribution panel ........................................................ 2-6
2.7.3 DC power warnings ................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.4 Electricity safety warning ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.8 TUV statutory warnings and requirements ........................................................................... 2-7
2.8.1 Identification of TUV CE listing ................................................................................................ 2-7
2.8.2 Warning label .......................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.8.3 Overcurrent protection requirements .................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.4 Equipment grounding requirements ....................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.5 Grounded conductors requirements....................................................................................... 2-8
2.9 ITU-T/Telcordia statutory warnings and requirements ......................................................... 2-9
2.9.1 DC supply circuit connection to the grounding conductor ..................................................... 2-9
2.9.2 Ethernet port precautions ....................................................................................................... 2-9
2.10 Laser safety requirements ................................................................................................... 2-10
2.10.1 Laser classification ................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.10.2 Laser information .................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.10.3 Warning labels for laser products ......................................................................................... 2-11

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iii


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Contents

2.10.4 Warning labels for Class 1M laser products .......................................................................... 2-11


2.10.5 Laser safety statutory warning .............................................................................................. 2-11
2.10.6 Training for laser safety ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2.10.7 Laser device operating precautions ...................................................................................... 2-12
2.11 Protection against electrostatic discharge .......................................................................... 2-13
2.11.1 General ESD protection guidelines ........................................................................................ 2-13
2.11.2 Personnel training ................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.11.3 Use of temporary EPA ........................................................................................................... 2-14
2.11.4 Work arrangements within a temporary EPA ....................................................................... 2-16
2.12 Environmental and health concerns .................................................................................... 2-16
2.12.1 Equipment disposal warning ................................................................................................. 2-18

3 Site preparation and rack installation .......................................................... 3-1


3.1 Site preparation ..................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Site environmental requirements ........................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Main equipment dimensions .................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.3 Physical location ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Power sources ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Unpack the equipment .......................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 OPT9608 rack installation options ......................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Rack space requirements ........................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.2 Optical rack ............................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.3.3 Rack environmental considerations ........................................................................................ 3-7
3.4 Preparation of cables and fibers ............................................................................................ 3-8
3.4.1 Grounding cables .................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.2 DC power cables ...................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.3 Alarm cables .......................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.4 Management cables .............................................................................................................. 3-11
3.4.5 Ethernet electrical cables ...................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.6 Optical fibers ......................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.5 OPT9608 accessories ........................................................................................................... 3-14
3.5.1 RAP units ............................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.5.2 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system ...................................................................................... 3-25
3.5.3 Power Distribution Units (PDU)............................................................................................. 3-29
3.6 Equipment rack installation ................................................................................................. 3-44
3.6.1 Mark the rack floor................................................................................................................ 3-44
3.6.2 Install the rack on a concrete floor ....................................................................................... 3-46

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iv


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Contents

3.6.3 Install the rack on a wooden floor ........................................................................................ 3-47


3.6.4 Install the rack on a raised floor ............................................................................................ 3-47
3.6.5 Attach the suspended overhead tray .................................................................................... 3-48
3.6.6 Install the extendable rails .................................................................................................... 3-48
3.6.7 Ground the rack .................................................................................................................... 3-49
3.7 Equipment installation ......................................................................................................... 3-51
3.7.1 Preliminary preparations....................................................................................................... 3-51
3.7.2 Installation sequence ............................................................................................................ 3-51
3.7.3 Installation options in ETSI optical rack ................................................................................. 3-53
3.7.4 Outline of installation procedure .......................................................................................... 3-53
3.8 Installing ancillary units in racks .......................................................................................... 3-54
3.8.1 Install the xRAP-100 .............................................................................................................. 3-55
3.8.2 Install the RAP-4B .................................................................................................................. 3-67
3.8.3 Install the RAP-E .................................................................................................................... 3-73
3.8.4 Install the PDUxxAL ............................................................................................................... 3-76
3.8.5 Install the OPP ....................................................................................................................... 3-76
3.8.6 Install the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 ............................................................................................. 3-79
3.8.7 AC/DC power supply connection options ............................................................................. 3-84
3.8.8 Install the FST ........................................................................................................................ 3-87
3.8.9 Install the ODF ....................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.8.10 Install the OPP ....................................................................................................................... 3-91
3.8.11 Install the FMT-1U patch panel ............................................................................................. 3-93
3.9 Install accessories in 23" racks ............................................................................................. 3-96
3.9.1 Attach PVC conduits to the 23" rack ..................................................................................... 3-96
3.9.2 Install cable holders .............................................................................................................. 3-97
3.9.3 Install the grounding bar ....................................................................................................... 3-98
3.9.4 Install the fiber spooler ......................................................................................................... 3-99

4 Platform installation.................................................................................... 4-1


4.1 Typical installation of a single OPT9608 ................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 Installation of four OPT9608 platforms ................................................................................. 4-4
4.3 Eight OPT9608/9904X vertical installation in 19" racks ........................................................ 4-6
4.3.1 Ventilation system for eight OPT9608/9904X in 19" racks ..................................................... 4-8
4.3.2 Attach 19" installation rulers to the rack .............................................................................. 4-13
4.3.3 Install RAP units ..................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.3.4 Install cold and hot ventilation units at the rear of the rack ................................................. 4-17
4.3.5 Install cold and hot ventilation units at front of the rack ..................................................... 4-18
4.3.6 Install four OPT9608/9904X platforms on the rack front ..................................................... 4-19

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Contents

4.3.7 Install four OPT9608/9904X platforms on the rack rear ....................................................... 4-21
4.3.8 Install covers on cold back ventilation units ......................................................................... 4-23
4.4 Install the OPT9608 platform in a rack ................................................................................ 4-24
4.4.1 Platform environmental considerations ............................................................................... 4-25
4.4.2 Installing OPT9608 in an optical ETSI rack ............................................................................. 4-25
4.5 Install the OPT9608 in a 23" rack ......................................................................................... 4-26
4.6 Typical installation of OPT9608 platforms in 23" racks ....................................................... 4-28
4.7 Grounding the OPT9608 platform ....................................................................................... 4-30
4.8 Connect grounding cables in 23" racks ................................................................................ 4-31
4.8.1 Connect the site grounding ................................................................................................... 4-31
4.8.2 Connect the OPT9608 grounding .......................................................................................... 4-32

5 Card and module installation....................................................................... 5-1


5.1 Install OPT9608 cards ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 Installing old/new PFM module in OPT9608 ........................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Install the PFM08_AC in the OPT9608 .................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.3 Install the FCM in the OPT9608 ............................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.4 Install the air filter in the FCM ................................................................................................ 5-7
5.1.5 Install the RCP card ................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.1.6 Install the NVM in the RCP ...................................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.7 SD (NVM) software upgrade ................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2 Insert/extract OPT96xx cards with regular or modified extractors ..................................... 5-12
5.2.1 Insert/extract OPT9608 cards with regular extractors .......................................................... 5-14
5.2.2 Insert/extract a card with modified extractors ..................................................................... 5-18
5.3 Install single-slot OPT9608 I/O modules .............................................................................. 5-21
5.4 Install double-slot OPT9608 I/O modules ............................................................................ 5-22
5.5 Install SFP/XFP transceivers in cards and I/O modules ........................................................ 5-24

6 Installation and connection of fibers and cables .......................................... 6-1


6.1 Cable routing options in the optical ETSI rack ....................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Fiber/cable guide ................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Upper fiber/cable guide .......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Lower fiber/cable guide .......................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Guidelines for routing fibers and cables in OPT96xx platforms ............................................ 6-6
6.3.1 Connect power cables ............................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.2 Connect alarm cables .............................................................................................................. 6-8
6.3.3 Connect electrical ethernet cables to I/O modules ................................................................ 6-9

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vi


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Contents

6.3.4 Connect optical fibers to I/O modules .................................................................................. 6-10


6.3.5 Connect management cables ................................................................................................ 6-11

7 OPT9608 platform initial setup .................................................................... 7-1


7.1 Required accessories ............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Setting up the system ............................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.1 Host Name (NE NAME) setup .................................................................................................. 7-4
7.2.2 Time and time zone setup ....................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 IP address, subnet mask, and NE gateway setup .................................................................... 7-5
7.2.4 NE discovery by the STMS setup ............................................................................................. 7-5

8 Commissioning tests.................................................................................... 8-1


8.1 Test equipment ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Site commissioning tests ......................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Check cards and modules installed in each platform .............................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Visual inspection and mechanical checks ................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.4 Measuring optical levels .......................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.5 Platform power-on test ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.6 Service commissioning tests ................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.7 Stability test ............................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.1.8 Path protection tests ............................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.9 System recovery and reset tests ............................................................................................. 8-5
8.1.10 Throughput and latency tests ................................................................................................. 8-6

9 Maintenance ............................................................................................... 9-1


9.1 Test equipment, tools, and materials .................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Preventive maintenance ........................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2.1 Air filter preventive maintenance ........................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.2 Maintaining optical fibers ....................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3 Onsite troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.1 Troubleshooting power problems ........................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.2 Troubleshooting cooling system problems ............................................................................. 9-7
9.3.3 Troubleshooting using component indicators ........................................................................ 9-7
9.4 Replacing cards and modules ................................................................................................ 9-9
9.4.1 Safety and workmanship ......................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.2 Install and remove component cards .................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.3 Replace RCP cards ................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.4.4 Replace the NVM on RCP cards ............................................................................................. 9-11

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vii


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Contents

9.4.5 Replace I/O modules ............................................................................................................. 9-11


9.4.6 Replace SFP/XFP transceivers ............................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.7 Replace the FCM ................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.5 Replace RAP components .................................................................................................... 9-13
9.5.1 Replace xRAP-100 circuit breakers ........................................................................................ 9-13
9.5.2 Replace RAP-4B circuit breakers ........................................................................................... 9-14

10 Connector pin assignments ....................................................................... 10-1


10.1 PFM DC input power connector .......................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 FCM ALARMS connector ...................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 Alarms client cable ................................................................................................................ 10-3
10.3 RCP connectors .................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.1 EXP1 and EXP2 connectors .................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 LOCAL MNG. connector......................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.3 CONSOLE connector .............................................................................................................. 10-6
10.4 xRAP-100 connectors ........................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.1 Shelf DC input power connectors .......................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.2 xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connectors ..................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.3 ALARM IN/OUT connector .................................................................................................... 10-9
10.5 RAP-4B connectors ............................................................................................................ 10-11
10.5.1 RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector ........................................................................................ 10-11
10.5.2 RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector...................................................................................... 10-13

11 VoIP telephone installation ....................................................................... 11-1


11.1 Introduction to VoIP telephone installation ........................................................................ 11-1
11.2 VoIP telephone installation sequence ................................................................................. 11-3
11.2.1 Attach the VoIP telephone shelf to the rack ......................................................................... 11-3
11.2.2 Remove the RAP-E front panel and bottom cover ................................................................ 11-4
11.2.3 Install terminal brackets in the RAP-E ................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.4 Connect the VoIP power cable to the RAP-E ......................................................................... 11-6
11.2.5 Connect power cable to the xRAP-100.................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.6 Connect power cable to the RAP-4B ..................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.7 Connect power cables to the VoIP telephone ....................................................................... 11-8
11.2.8 Connect the ethernet cable to the VoIP telephone .............................................................. 11-9
11.3 VoIP software configuration ................................................................................................ 11-9
11.4 Provision the VoIP (SIP) phone .......................................................................................... 11-10

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary viii


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Contents

12 Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors ........................................... 12-1


12.1 Optical connector cleanliness .............................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1 Handling of optical fibers and components .......................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Inspection and cleaning ....................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.1 Inspection devices ................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.2.2 Inspect optical connectors .................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 Cleaning methods and materials ......................................................................................... 12-8
12.3.1 Cleaning methods.................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.3.2 Dry cleaning materials ........................................................................................................... 12-8
12.3.3 Wet cleaning materials ....................................................................................................... 12-11
12.4 Optical connectors cleaning procedures ........................................................................... 12-11
12.4.1 Clean an optical connector with a cleaning cassette .......................................................... 12-11
12.4.2 Dry cleaning an optical connector with lint-free wipes ...................................................... 12-13
12.4.3 Dry cleaning with lint-free swabs ........................................................................................ 12-14
12.4.4 Dry cleaning with ferrule cleaner device ............................................................................. 12-14
12.4.5 Wet cleaning with lint-free wipes ....................................................................................... 12-15
12.4.6 Wet cleaning with lint-free swabs ....................................................................................... 12-16
12.5 Measure the fiber parameters for Raman-based or hybrid Raman-based amplifier ........ 12-17

13 Standards and references .......................................................................... 13-1


13.1 Environment and Safety ...................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute ................................................... 13-2
13.3 IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission .................................................................. 13-3
13.4 IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers .......................................................... 13-3
13.5 IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force ................................................................................. 13-4
13.6 ISO: International Organization for Standardization ........................................................... 13-6
13.7 ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union .................................................................. 13-6
13.8 MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum ............................................................................................... 13-7
13.9 North American Standards .................................................................................................. 13-7

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix


Useful information
This document describes the procedures for installing, cable routing, and connecting of the OPT9608
platform and its related accessories. In addition, it provides information for the platform maintenance.
The manual is intended for installation and other qualified service personnel responsible for installing the
system and its accessories.
The instructions require you to understand and follow the safety practices included here, as well as any
applicable national regulations and those enforced at your site. They also require that you understand the
physical, optical, and electrical requirements of the installation site.

Related documents
 Apollo 96xx General Description
 Apollo 96xx Reference Manual
 Apollo 96xx System Specifications
 ShadeTree® User Guide
 LightSoft® (Network Management System) User Manual
 IEC Publication 825 – Laser Safety Requirements

Contact information
Telephone Email
ECI Documentation Group +972-3-9268145 techdoc.feedback@ecitele.com
ECI Customer Support +972-3-9266000 on.support@ecitele.com

Revision history
Revision Section Description
1 N/A New

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary x


1 Apollo OPT96xx product line
The Apollo 96xx product line combines valuable functionality with an economical installation plan that can
be tailored to network requirements. The modular design, with the same service and photonic cards used
in all Apollo 96xx platforms in all service slots, makes network operation simple and highly cost effective.
Apollo 96xx's modular architecture enables in-service system upgrades to increase the number of channels
by simply adding service cards or cages to the existing installation. For example, up to 100 XFPs can be
installed in a single OPT9624 platform. With three platform cages fitting into a single rack, the system
supports up to 300 XFPs per rack, providing one of the densest systems currently available on the market.
Apollo 96xx's intelligent architecture facilitates smooth in-service migration.
The Apollo 96xx product line includes the following platforms:
 OPT9624 for metro and regional/long haul applications
This platform can be optimized for three basic configurations:
 Pure WDM,
 Packet-OTS for metro edge applications with 100 Gbps Ethernet/MPLS switch
 Packet-OTS for metro-core/regional long haul applications with 1 Tbps universal fabric. This
platform supports both ODU cross connect and Ethernet/MPLS packet switching.
Platform dimensions are sized for ETSI racks, with 675 mm height (15U), 530 mm width, and 300 mm
depth.
Figure 1-1: OPT9624 platform

 OPT9608 for metro edge and inline amplifier applications


This platform can be optimized for three basic configurations:

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Apollo OPT96xx product line

 Pure WDM,
 Packet-OTS with Ethernet/MPLS switch
 Inline amplifier.
Platform dimensions are sized for 19" racks, with 225 mm height (5U), 482 mm width, and 300 mm
depth.
Figure 1-2: OPT9608 platform

 OPT9603 for metro access and inline amplifier applications:


This platform can be optimized for three basic configurations:
 Pure WDM,
 OMLT with Ethernet/MPLS switch (future)
 Inline amplifier.
Platform dimensions are sized for 19" racks, with 88 mm height (2U), 482 mm width, and 300 mm
depth.
Figure 1-3: OPT9603 platform

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-2


2 Installation safety guidelines
Read the following safety guidelines before performing any platform installation or maintenance
operations on Apollo equipment.
You must adhere to these safety guidelines carefully.

WARNING: Apollo 96xx equipment (the "Apollo 96xx equipment" or the "Equipment") is
intended for installation in restricted access areas only.

WARNING: Apollo 96xx equipment has two power sources. Disconnect both before servicing.
Before starting installation, make sure that the DC power is not connected to the rack, and
that the circuit breakers in the RAP or in the user-provided power distribution panel are set to
OFF.

2.1 Warning definition


WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could result in severe bodily
injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the potential electrical hazards and
become familiar with accident prevention measures.

2.2 Qualified personnel warning


WARNING: Only trained, qualified personnel should install, maintain, or replace the router.

2.3 Installation warning


WARNING: Before you connect the router to a power source, read the installation
instructions in this guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.4 General safety requirements


Apollo 96xx platforms contain power sources of varying voltages. Make sure to install the platforms in
compliance with the following guidelines:
 Use the equipment in restricted access locations only.
 Note that the equipment racks and Apollo 96xx platforms are suitable for mounting on raised or
concrete floors, or other noncombustible surfaces only.
 Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections.
 Apollo 96xx platforms must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
 Sufficient lighting is available while working on the equipment.
 Do not work on any equipment connected to a voltage source (DC or AC), except for
inserting/removing cards or modules (these activities can be performed on operating equipment).
 Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 50°C.
 Use only insulated tools for connecting electrical cables, during installation.
 Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations.
 Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for example, electrical tributaries)
during thunderstorms (when applicable).
 Avoid contact with high voltage sources when installing platforms, cards, and modules.
 Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels affixed to the equipment, and strictly
observe the procedures to avoid the indicated hazards.

2.5 Jewelry removal warning


WARNING: Before you work on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove any
jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). When connected to power and ground,
metal objects may heat up and cause serious burns or weld the objects to the terminals.

2.6 Grounding requirements


All equipment, including Apollo 96xx platforms, ancillary units, and equipment from other vendors, must be
properly grounded at all times. Good grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize
noise, and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.
Proper operation of the Apollo 96xx equipment requires that the positive supply line be connected to the
common ground (CGND) of the site at the power source, in accordance with ETS300132-2.

WARNING: When installing the router, the ground connection must always be made first and
disconnected last.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.6.1 Rack grounding requirements


The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt ('grounding stud') welded to the rack
frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol label. The stud must be free of
paint. The rack also has a rack grounding bar, which includes a set of connection points for grounding all the
equipment used in the rack. The following figure highlights the rack grounding stud and rack grounding bar
on an optical rack used in a typical installation.
Figure 2-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

A connection must be made between the rack grounding bar and the site grounding bar in compliance with
UL/ETSI recommendations. For example, grounding may be completed by means of a copper cable with
green/yellow insulation of the same diameter as the power feeding cables (or thicker), and as short as
possible. A length of appropriate 50 mm2 grounding cable is included with the platform accessories. As long
as the grounding connection is in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations, a different connection bar
may also be used. The rack grounding stud is connected to the rack grounding bar by means of a metal
panel. These rack grounding connections are highlighted in the following figure.
Figure 2-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.6.2 Equipment grounding requirements


Each equipment unit mounted on the rack is grounded to the rack frame by the retaining bolts and nuts
attaching the unit to the rack frame.
Equipment grounding is performed via the mounting brackets to the rack rails. The mounting bracket's
internal surface facing the rails and the equipment must be free of paint and provide electrical continuity to
the equipment frame. Check that the resistance between any mounting bracket and the equipment frame
(chassis) is lower than 0.1 .

WARNING: To prevent possible damage to Apollo 96xx equipment, all racks and equipment
must be completely grounded before connecting any external devices powered from an AC
source (110/220 V) to the platform. All grounding procedures described in Grounding the
OPT9608 platform must be completed before, for example, connecting an external PC to
configure and initialize the network element (NE) management system.

2.6.3 Grounding requirements for NEBS compliance


The following statements confirm that the Apollo 96xx equipment complies with NEBS Grounding
requirements.

NOTES:
 The Apollo 96xx equipment is suitable for installation as part of a Common Bonding
Network or an Isolated Bonding Network, or both.
 The DC battery return input terminals can be connected to an Isolated dc return (DC-I),
Common dc return (DC-C), or both.

2.7 Power supply requirements


For more information about power supply requirements, refer to the Apollo 96xx System Specifications.

2.7.1 Connection via RAP


Apollo 96xx platforms require two power sources with voltage of -40.5 VDC ranging to -72 VDC, with the
positive line connected to the site ground. The nominal feeding voltage is -48 VDC.

NOTE: The working voltage range for the USA market is -48 VDC.

Each power source must be protected by a TUV-listed circuit breaker installed in the RAP. These circuit
breakers are included in the installation kit supplied with the equipment, and their current ratings are
therefore in accordance with the order.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

In addition, the site operator must provide a readily accessible TUV-listed disconnect device incorporated in
the fixed power wiring of the site. The device limits the maximum delivered current to a safe value.

2.7.2 Connection via user-provided power distribution


panel
The requirements described in Connection via RAP also apply when a user-provided power distribution
panel is used.
The circuit breakers to be used for the various OPT96xx platforms must be UL-listed as described in the
following table.

Table 2-1: OPT96xx shelves circuit breaker rating

Platform Circuit breaker rating (A)


OPT9603 12A
OPT9608 30A

2.7.3 DC power warnings

WARNING: Follow this wiring sequence when connecting power: ground to ground, positive
lead to +RTN terminal, and negative lead to -48V terminal. To disconnect power, perform the
sequence in reverse order. Always connect the ground wire first and disconnect it last.

WARNING: Ensure the DC input wiring is connected in the correct polarity, as reversed
polarity may trip the circuit breaker or damage the equipment.

WARNING: When stranded wiring is used, make sure that no "stray" strands protrude from
the DC power entry terminals.

WARNING: Before working on the equipment or near the power entries, ensure that the
power cables have been disconnected from both DC power entry terminals. Do not touch the
DC power entries while the power cables are connected. Voltages may be present within the
power entries when the power is switched off and the power cables are connected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.7.4 Electricity safety warning

WARNING: Do not touch uninsulated wiring or ports when they have not been disconnected
from a power source, as doing so may result in electrical shock.

2.8 TUV statutory warnings and requirements


This section outlines the TUV statutory warnings and requirements applicable to Apollo 96xx platforms.

2.8.1 Identification of TUV CE listing


OPT9608 platforms are TUV CE-listed. The following is a typical TUV CE label.
Figure 2-3: 96008 platform TUV CE label

2.8.2 Warning label


The following warning label is affixed alongside the Apollo 96xx power input connectors and the RAP circuit
breakers.
Figure 2-4: Warning label

CAUTION: Apollo 96xx equipment has two power sources. Disconnect both before servicing.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.8.3 Overcurrent protection requirements

NOTE: Rating and type of overcurrent protection are according to Classification Level 5 (L5)
for power supplies having output circuits that meet the requirements for SELV circuits.

WARNING: Observe the following precautions when replacing circuit breakers:


 Replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and rating.
 Disconnect power before changing a circuit breaker

2.8.4 Equipment grounding requirements

CAUTION: The equipment must have a connection between the grounded conductor of the
DC power supply circuit and the equipment grounding conductor.

Connect the equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding
jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode is
connected.
Locate the equipment in the same immediate area (for example, in adjacent racks) as any other equipment
that has a connection between the grounding conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding
conductor, and as the grounding point of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere.
Position the DC supply source in the same premises as this equipment.
Do not switch or disconnect devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the
point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.

2.8.5 Grounded conductors requirements


Connect the equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding
jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor
is connected.
Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the equipment. There must be no switching or
disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of
connection of the grounding electrode conductor.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.9 ITU-T/Telcordia statutory warnings and


requirements
This section outlines the ITU-T and Telcordia statutory warnings and requirements applicable to Apollo 96xx
platforms. The source for these requirements can be found in IEC 60950-1/3.2.1.2.

2.9.1 DC supply circuit connection to the grounding


conductor

WARNING: There must be a connection between the grounded conductor of the DC power
supply circuit and the equipment grounding conductor. See installation instructions for more
details.
When this connection is made, all the following conditions must be met:
 The equipment is connected directly to the supply system grounding electrode conductor
or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar/bus to which the DC supply system
grounding electrode is connected.
 The equipment is located in the same immediate area (such as adjacent cabinets) as any
other equipment that has a connection between the grounded conductor of the same DC
supply circuit and the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the DC
system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere.
 The DC supply source is located within the same premises as this equipment.
 There is no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between
the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.

2.9.2 Ethernet port precautions

WARNING:
 Ethernet ports must be cabled with shielded cables and the shield grounded at both ends.
 Intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are suitable for connection to
intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. Intra-building ports of the equipment
or subassembly MUST NOT be connected metallically to interfaces that connect to the
OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only
(Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from
the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in
order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.10 Laser safety requirements


2.10.1 Laser classification
The equipment and components equipped with laser devices described in this manual comply with the
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards, including IEC 60825-1 and IEC
60825-2 - Safety of Laser Products.
Except for certain high power EDFA and Raman optical amplifiers, Apollo 96xx equipment is classified as
Class 1 laser products. The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light and the beam is totally
enclosed during normal operating modes of customer operation. As long as the equipment is operated in
accordance with the applicable safety instructions, the Hazard Level in equipment access locations is
inherently Class 1M or lower.
This product and installation information is provided so that the products may be installed and serviced
safely.

2.10.2 Laser information


Starting V7.2 of the Apollo 96xx OPT96xx product line, a new optical amplifier is introduced:
 OA_EHRSF: Hybrid module that consists of a counter-propagating Raman pump unit and a variable
gain (VG) EDFA connected back to back. Includes bi-directional ports, OTDR port and high power
connectors (OSC port embedded inside). Max. output power: Raman=500mW; EDFA=20.5dBm (class
1M hazard level). Gain range: 19dB to 37dB (+3dB gain padding).
The Laser information for the amplifier is listed in the following table.

Table 2-2: OA_EHRSF laser information


Card Wavelength range Power Notes
OA_EHRSF Extended C-band EDFA: 112mW (+20.5 dBm) Includes internal ALS
(1528 nm-1567 nm) Raman 500mW (+27 dBm) mechanisms
standards: IEC 60825-1:2007 and
60825-2:2004+A1.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.10.3 Warning labels for laser products


The following labels are affixed near Figure 2-5: laser class 1
the optical connectors of optical
cards and modules to indicate that
the product is classified as a Class 1
laser product.

The following labels are affixed near Figure 2-6: Caution label
the optical connectors of optical
cards and modules with a laser to
indicate that the product is
classified as a Class 1M laser
product.

2.10.4 Warning labels for Class 1M laser products


The following labels indicate that the corresponding cards are classified as Laser 1M products with the
Wavelength and Power marked on the labels.

OA_EHRS

OA_HRS

2.10.5 Laser safety statutory warning


All personnel involved in equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be aware that laser
radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam,
personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into
optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
Remember that observing safety precautions is not a matter of personal choice; ignoring safety puts all the
people within line of sight in danger!

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.10.6 Training for laser safety


Personnel must be trained for safety before being authorized to operate, install, and/or maintain laser
products. The IEC 60825 standards require organizations to appoint a laser safety officer who is responsible
for training personnel, establishing safe operational procedures, and supervising the implementation of
these procedures during routine work.
Untrained personnel must not be allowed to operate, install, and/or maintain laser products.

2.10.7 Laser device operating precautions


In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to observe the following warnings
when operating a product equipped with a laser device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in
bodily injury and damage to equipment.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:


 Protection goggles with nominal OD2 for the wavelength range of 1300 nm to 1600 nm
are recommended. Protection goggles are mandatory for tasks performed on equipment
with up to 30 dBm optical power lasers.
 Hot insertion or swapping of a DWDM module or optical interface module must be carried
out only by authorized personnel.
 During hot removal and insertion of a fiber termination, avoid looking into the fiber to
prevent irremediable damage to your eyes.
 Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber terminations not currently in use.
 Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures associated with the
laser device other than those specified herein.
 Only authorized service technicians must repair the unit.
 To avoid potential fiber fusing, burnt connectors, or loss of laser power, ensure all high
power connections are clean before you power on the optical amplifier.
It is strictly forbidden to override any protective devices and interlocks used to prevent direct
exposure to the laser beam.

WARNING: Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of optical ports when
no fiber cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open apertures.

WARNING:
 The connection from EDFA (OA_XXX) must be made using a single fiber (not using an MTP
connector) with EDFA (OA_XXX)
 The total output power from the MTP connector (optical power) must not exceed 20 dbm.
 In a configuration including several MTP connectors, the minimum distance between the
connectors must be based on IEC60825 requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

Figure 2-7: Examples of fiber optic patch panels

2.11 Protection against electrostatic discharge


This section provides guidelines for protecting Apollo 96xx equipment and its components against damage
from electrostatic discharge (ESD) during handling, packaging/unpackaging, transportation, installation,
commissioning, inspection, servicing, and maintenance activities.
Items sensitive to ESD are identified by the basic ESD warning symbol shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-8: Basic ESD warning symbol

The information in this section presents generally accepted workmanship practices and procedures that,
when properly applied, minimize the probability of electrostatic damage to Apollo 96xx equipment and its
components.
The information is also in line with CENELEC Electronic Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC
00 015 that deals with protection of devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESDS devices).

2.11.1 General ESD protection guidelines


Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be damaged by ESDs. An ESD
between two objects occurs when an object carrying static electrical charges touches, or is brought near
the other object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of insulating materials or separation
of two such surfaces, and may also be induced by electrical fields. Routine activities, such as walking across
an insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and so on, can easily build up
charges to levels that may cause damage, especially when humidity is low.
In many cases, the buildup of charges can be avoided by using special materials, for example, garments and
packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistivity but are not insulators.
The best approach to avoiding damage by ESD includes a combination of means and procedures that:

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

 Avoids build-up of electrostatic charges


 Creates a protected work environment preventing ESD
 Provides means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic charges when entering the
protected work environment

NOTE: An area in which ESDS devices can be handled with minimum risk of damage and in
which the operator is not exposed to additional risks, is called an ESD Protected Area (EPA).

2.11.2 Personnel training


During production and assembly, equipment is handled in work spaces especially prepared and certified to
serve as a permanent EPA. However, in many cases, the environment in which the same equipment is
installed or maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled boundary.
Therefore, all the work requiring the handling of unprotected ESDS devices must be considered as field
work.
Field work in this context includes activities such as service and maintenance, installation, site inspection,
and commissioning of components and assemblies classified as ESDS, together with the packing and
unpacking activities associated with such activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform field work in the same way as work
performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material quality and personal responsibilities, training,
labeling, and packaging.

2.11.3 Use of temporary EPA


Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. A typical temporary EPA arrangement suitable for field
work on a platform equipment is shown in the following figure. The EPA tool kit includes:
 Wrist strap with 1 M  series resistor
 Bonding strap with 1 M  series resistor
 ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or flooring capable of providing
protection against ESD.

CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a way that ensures electrical bonding
of all the materials used, and prevents any sudden changes in potential within the EPA that
could cause unacceptable voltages or discharges to be applied to ESDS devices.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

Figure 2-9: Typical temporary EPA arrangement

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-15


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

2.11.4 Work arrangements within a temporary EPA


To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following arrangements must be observed
by persons entering and/or performing field work within a temporary EPA:
 All operators working within a temporary EPA must wear, as a minimum, an antistatic protecting
garment made of cotton.
 If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to walk and move within that
area, the floor must be capable of providing protection against ESD.
 The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling an ESDS device.
 If it becomes necessary to remove an ESDS device from equipment and transfer it to a temporary
work surface away from the equipment, the ESDS device must be given protective packaging unless
equipotential bonding of the operator to ground is maintained.
 An ESDS device must be placed directly into protective packaging upon removal from equipment. A
replacement ESDS device must be kept in its protective packaging until required for immediate
installation in the equipment.
 The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools necessary to maintain and control
the temporary EPA are available at the place of the field work at service time.
 All tools intended for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be so constructed that they do
not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.

2.12 Environmental and health concerns


ECI committed to achieving high standards of environmental quality and product safety.
The International Standardization Organization (ISO) has developed the internationally recognized
standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. These are quality management standards that are administered by
independent accreditation and certification bodies.
ISO 9000 is a family of standards for quality management systems that has been accepted as a model when
assessing the adequacy of quality management systems. Some of the requirements in ISO 9001 (one of the
standards in the ISO 9000 family) include:
 Procedures that cover all key business processes
 Process monitoring to ensure effectiveness
 Adequate record-keeping
 Monitoring output for defects, with appropriate and corrective action where necessary
 Regular review of individual processes and the complete quality system as a whole
 Facilitating continual improvement
ISO 14000 is the international specification for an Environmental Management System (EMS). It specifies
requirements for establishing an environmental policy, determining environmental aspects and impacts of
products, activities, and services, planning environmental objectives and measurable targets,
implementation and operation of programs to meet objectives and targets, checking and corrective action,
and management review. ECI's Quality and Environmental Management Systems were certified to these
ISO standards and are periodically audited by third-party organizations.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-16


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

ECI policies and products meet the spirit of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Design for the
Environment (DfE) Program to reduce risk to people and the environment by preventing pollution and
improving energy efficiency. ECI is certified to OHSAS 18000, which was developed as a standard against
which occupational safety management systems can objectively be assessed. OHSAS 18000 (compatible
with ISO 9001 and ISO 14001) is being developed through a concerted effort from a number of the world's
leading national standards bodies, certification bodies, and specialist consultancies.
As a part of ECI's environmental commitment and in pursuit of compliance with applicable environmental
legislation, ECI makes every effort to ensure that its products supplied to the EU market are compliant with
the RoHS Europe directive restricting use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment. ECI also requires RoHS compliance from all its suppliers. All new electrical and electronic
equipment delivered to locations within the EU do not contain any cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), hexavalent
chromium compounds (Cr6+), mercury (Hg), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB), or polybrominated diphenyl
ethers (PBDE), subject to certain exemptions and limitations as outlined in the RoHS directive.
Without limiting the generality of the preceding statement, we wish to stress that use of lead in solders in
network infrastructure equipment has been exempted by the RoHS directive and may be found in certain
ECI products.
All equipment delivered to locations within the EU complies with the requirements of the RoHS Europe
directive. Similarly, ECI equipment is compliant with the RoHS California directive and RoHS Chinese
directive where relevant. All ECI equipment included in the Electronic Information Products (EIP) category
includes a table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements, verifying hazardous substance levels in
accordance with the RoHS China directive. Equipment documentation includes the appropriate
Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) lifespan symbol indicating the point in time when the
equipment may be expected to enter the recycling system. The following are examples of these pollution
control symbols.
Figure 2-10: pollution control logos

Note: The number in Logo 2 is for illustrative purposes only. When in actual use, the number
indicates the corresponding environmental protection use period of the product.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-17


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation safety guidelines

ECI adheres to the Waste Electrical and Electronic equipment (WEEE) directive requiring that all new
products introduced into the EU market be labeled with the crossed-out wheeled bin recycling symbol
defined by CENELEC standard EN 50419 and accepted by the member states. Note that specific WEEE
procedures may differ from state to state, depending on the local implementation of the WEEE
requirements.
Figure 2-11: WEEE recycling symbol

Do not dispose of ECI equipment and accessories together with standard household waste. Check with ECI
technical support for information about product disposal, including recycling and reuse. For more
information about ECI's environmental, health, and safety policy, see the quality policy pages on ECI
website. (Environmental, Health, and Safety Policy)
For any further information regarding environmental and safety policies, contact technical support.

2.12.1 Equipment disposal warning

WARNING: The ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to national
laws and regulations.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-18


3 Site preparation and rack installation
The following sections describe the conditions required for installing the equipment at the site, including
site preparation, power sources, rack installation, preparing cables and fibers, installing ancillary units and
more.

3.1 Site preparation


Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking the following issues into consideration:
 Site environmental requirements, including work and equipment safety requirements
 Dimensions of the equipment
 Physical location of the OPT9608 platforms
 Location of power sources, including types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical,
management, alarm monitoring, etc.)

3.1.1 Site environmental requirements


The following environmental conditions must be provided at the installation site.

Parameter Compliance requirements


Electromagnetic interference FTZ 1TR9, EN 55022-2/2003, EN 50082-1/97
Temperature ETSI ETS 300 019-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1

3.1.2 Main equipment dimensions


Table 3-1: Equipment dimensions

Equipment type Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Max. weight (kg)
OPT9608 221 443 242 8.76 (platform only)
26.3 (fully populated)
xRAP-100 135 530 190 3.84
RAP-4B 133 445 185 10
Upper fiber/cable guide 100 533 72 0.65
Lower fiber/cable guide 100 533 72 0.65
Fiber spooler 125 533 144 1.5
ODF 44.5 440 240 8
OPP 44.5 440 240 8

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.1.3 Physical location

WARNING: OPT9608 platforms are intended for installation in restricted access areas only.

1. Choose the physical location of the OPT9608 platforms, taking the following aspects into
consideration:Equipment dimensions, as specified in Main Equipment Dimensions.
 Required floor loading capability: 160 kg per rack for a typical 4-platform installation.
 Free airflow through the rack to the platforms must be guaranteed at all times.
 Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring, and management cables, and optical
fibers. To ensure convenient access to cables and fibers, it is recommended to use overhead cable
ladders whenever possible to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
2. When a network management station, for example STMS, is installed on the site, consider the
method of connection to the local network management station and the maximum allowed distance.

3.1.4 Power sources


OPT96xx equipment must be powered only by DC sources in compliance with the applicable sections of
ETSI 300 132-2 and FTZ 19PFL1, and the SELV of EN 60950-1 requirements. The nominal supply voltage is -
48 VDC (positive lead grounded); the allowed supply voltage range is -40 VDC to -72 VDC. For redundancy,
use two separate DC power sources.
The power consumption of the OPT9608 is:
 Typical: 555 W
 Typical power dissipation: 1427 BTU/hr.
 Maximum: 1127 W

NOTE: If the input power connected to the PFM exceeds -72 VDC, it will report an overvoltage
condition to the RCP, which will generate a critical alarm. Each module sensing an overvoltage
condition will be turned off.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.2 Unpack the equipment

 Perform a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes. Immediately report evidence of damage to
the carrier, the project manager, and your local sales representative.
 You must unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.

CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices


Proper handling and grounding precautions required
OPT9608 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To prevent ESD damage, strictly
observe all the precautions listed in Protection against electrostatic discharge. Keep parts and
cards in their antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded equipment frame or rack is
recommended when handling cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.

To unpack the equipment:


1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a short knife so as not to
damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each item for damage. Check for loose parts or
any visual damage to the rack, platform, and auxiliary equipment. Also check the integrity of all the
connectors, leads, and cables.

NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors until optical cables are
connected to them.

3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be present.
4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not remove the modules/cards
from their individual protective packages until they can be inserted in the platform.
5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached to each box. If damaged
parts are detected or if any parts are missing, notify the project manager and your local sales
representative.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.3 OPT9608 rack installation options


OPT96xx platforms can be installed in the following rack types:
 The recommended enhanced ETSI optical rack (hereafter referred to as the optical rack). These racks
have been specially adapted to meet platform requirements and simplify platform installation and
maintenance. They offer:
 Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient maintenance of all rack cables
(control, power, and data, where relevant).
 Two channels on the rack’s front rails for routing up to 800 optical fibers.
 Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension floors and/or ceiling
ladders.
Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see Site environmental requirements).
 Front door for left or right opening mounting.
 ISO 19 racks and standard US racks. These racks must be used only in consultation with and when
approved by the vendor.
OPT9608 platform rack options are summarized in the following table.

Table 3-2: Equipment rack data


Type Height Width Depth Available space
Optical rack 2200 mm 600 mm 330 mm 47U (2100 mm)
US 7 ft. (2134 mm) 23 in. (585 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 44U (6.5 ft./1960 mm)
US 7 ft. (2134 mm) 19 in. (483 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 44U (6.5 ft./1960 mm)
ISO 19 7.25 ft. (2200 mm) 24 in. (600 mm) 24 in. (600 mm) 47U (6.85 ft./2089 mm)

The loading of a fully equipped rack is 7.68 kn/m2, or 55.35 kn/ft.

NOTES:
 Not all OPT9608 platforms can be installed in all types of racks. This section includes a
list of available rack options. The installation instructions for each platform include a list
of appropriate racks.
 The installation instructions in this manual apply to the enhanced rack. Some of these
instructions may not be relevant if you are using a standard rack supplied by other
vendors.
 Before any installation plan can be completed, a site survey by the technical support
team is required to verify rack accessibility and accessory compatibility at that site. If
you are working with standard racks from other vendors, the site survey is also essential
to determine what changes are required to adapt the rack to the OPT9608 platform
installation requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

All OPT9608 platform equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or suspended floors, or
suspended from overhead mountings. Some of these installation options are described in Installing
Equipment Racks. If your facility uses a different installation paradigm, contact Customer Support for
additional information.

3.3.1 Rack space requirements


The following table summarizes the dimensions and space requirements of the OPT96xx platforms and
their associated components.

Table 3-3: Rack space requirements

Equipment type Height (U) Height (mm/in.)


OPT9608 5 221/8.7
xRAP-100 3 135/5.44
RAP-4B 3 133/5.33
Fiber spooler 2.8 125/4.92
FST 1 44.5/1.75
Upper fiber/cable guide 2 90/3.5
Lower fiber/cable guide 2 90/3.5
Cable guide 3 120/4.7

In addition, make sure at least 1U (approximately 50 mm or 2 in.) free space is left between the bottom of
the last unit installed in the rack and the rack floor.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.3.2 Optical rack


A special optical rack is used to accommodate the potentially large number of fiber cables that may be
required for the installation of Apollo 96xx equipment. An added advantage of the optical rack is easy
access to all the components and cables during installation, maintenance, and when adding new cards and
modules. The rack has two cable conduits for easy routing of cables.
Figure 3-1: Optical rack components

NOTE: When necessary, the rear cover of the rack can also be removed.

In addition to the wide cable conduits, two easily accessible fiber channels are located at the rack sides in
front of the conduits.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.3.3 Rack environmental considerations


Observe the following guidelines when installing the OPT9608 platform in a rack:
 Free airflow through the rack must be guaranteed at all times.
 OPT9608 platforms can be installed in open or closed (with door) racks. When installed in a closed
rack, the door must be perforated. An example of a rack with a perforated door is the ETSI optical
rack shown in the following figure.
 Always install the first OPT9608 platform in the lower part of the rack, leaving a space of at least 1U
from the bottom of the rack.
 In mixed (horizontal and vertical airflow) equipment installations, always install the equipment with
the horizontal airflow in the lower part of the rack, and the equipment with the vertical airflow above
it.
 Leave a space of at least 1U between the upper accessory of the OPT9608 and the next platform.
 Leave as much space as possible between the rack’s cable supports and the OPT9608 sidewalls.
 Always consider the platform airflow requirements when organizing the cable and fiber routes near
the OPT9608 sidewalls.
 In complex installations, consult with Apollo 96xx experts who can help you with the design.
Figure 3-2: ETSI A rack closed view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.4 Preparation of cables and fibers


This section describes how to prepare cables and optical fibers.

NOTE: You can order the necessary cables. For details, contact Customer Support or your local
sales representative.

 Grounding cables
 DC power cables
 Alarm cables
 Management cables
 Ethernet electrical cables
 Optical fibers
DC power and traffic cables must be prepared on site. The control and alarm cables used within the
OPT96xx equipment racks are included in the shipment according to the specific order.
The following sections describe how to prepare cables on site. Refer to Connector pin assignments for a
description of the equipment connector types and cable wiring.

WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and grounding cables, use only UL-
listed components of the specified types. Components must also comply with any
applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.

3.4.1 Grounding cables


Rack equipment is bonded through thread forming that fastens the equipment chassis to the frame of the
rack. It is therefore necessary to provide a reliable low-impedance connection between the rack frame and
the site grounding bus using copper conductors.

1. Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding bar by means of a
copper lead with green/yellow insulation having the same diameter as the RAP input power cable or
thicker, in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations.
2. The end of the lead connected to a RAP, as used in the rack, must be terminated in an M8 lug.
3. Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route.
Treat the bare portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole compression
lug. If the lug is not plated, bring it to a bright finish and coat it with antioxidant before connecting it
to the frame of the rack.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

WARNINGS:
 Only trained qualified personnel must install, maintain, or replace the equipment.
 Use only UL-listed components of the specified types.
 Components must also comply with any applicable national and local safety codes and
regulations.

3.4.2 DC power cables


According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be
connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the
BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a blue
cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable
connections, use cables with colors complying with the standards in your area of residence.

WARNINGS:
 Only trained qualified personnel must install, maintain, or replace the equipment.
 Use only UL-listed components of the specified types.
 Components must also comply with any applicable national and local safety codes and
regulations.

DC power cables can be prepared on site or ordered. Two types of DC power cables are needed:
 RAP input power cables
 Platform power cables

3.4.2.1 RAP input power cables


The RAP input power cables connect power from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input
connectors of the rack's RAP panel.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The cables must use copper leads
complying with UL/ETSI recommendations.
The RAP cable ends must be terminated in cable lugs matching the conductor gauge with M8 lugs for all
RAP types (xRAP-100 or RAP-4B).
The recommended cable gauge is 1 AWG (50 mm2/0.078 in.2) or thicker for the xRAP-100, and 2 AWG
(35 mm2/0.054 in.2) or thicker for the RAP-4B. This gauge ensures that the voltage drop across the rack
power cable at full power consumption does not exceed 2 V, even for cable runs up to 30 meters (99 feet)
connected to a RAP providing power to four OPT9608 platforms.
When a RAP is used to provide power to a single OPT9608 platform, lower lead gauges may be used:

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

 For cable runs not exceeding 20 meters (66 feet), it is sufficient to use 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) copper
leads.
 For cable runs not exceeding 30 meters (99 feet), it is sufficient to use 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) copper
leads.

NOTES:
 If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also be reduced to the gauge of the
power leads, that is, 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) for lengths up to 20 meters (66 feet), and
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) for lengths up to 30 meters (99 feet).
 The ground cable must be at least the same thickness as the RAP power cable.
 The thickness of the platform grounding cable must match the thickness of the power
cable from the RAP to the platform.

3.4.2.2 Platform power cables


Two supplied 12 AWG cables are used to connect the two redundant input power sources from the RAP
panel to the power connectors on the PFM-A and PFM-B modules of each OPT9608 platform installed in
the rack.

NOTE: Operation of the OPT9608 platform with a single PFM module is also supported (non-
redundant option).

The following types of cables are available:


 Power cable with a 2W2S/2C connector on the end connecting to the PFM and a 3W3P/3C connector
on the end connecting to the xRAP-100
OR
Power cable with a 2W2S/2C connector on the end connecting to the PFM and a 5W5P/5C connector
on the end connecting to the xRAP-100
 Power cable with a 2W2S/2C connector on the end connecting to the PFM and open with terminal
pins on the end connecting to a RAP-4B

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.4.3 Alarm cables


Alarm cables that can be provided in the shipment according to your order include:
 Platform alarm indication cable. One platform alarm indication cable is required for each OPT9608
platform installed in the rack. One end of the cable is always connected to the ALARMS connector on
the fan control module (FCM) unit in the corresponding platform. The other end of the cable is
connected to one of the SHELF connectors on the xRAP-100/RAP-4B/PDUxxAL unit.
 Client direct alarm cable. When a RAP/PDU unit is not used, the alarm cable is connected to the
ALARMS connector on the FCM unit, and the other end is open and connects to the client's alarm
collecting facility.
 External alarm cable. One bay alarm cable is required for each rack. This cable carries the alarm
indications and monitoring lines of the bay (rack). One end of the cable is connected to the ALARM
IN/OUT connector on the xRAP-100/RAP-4B/PDUxxAL; the other end is open and connects to the
client's alarm collecting facility.

3.4.4 Management cables


Out-of-band management communication is connected to the OPT9608 by means of a RJ-45 Ethernet
connector EXP2, located on the RCP cards. The STMS management station is connected directly to this
interface.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources. Cables of Category 3 or better
must be used. The length of the cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type in
use (up to a few dozen meters).

3.4.5 Ethernet electrical cables


I/O cards with Ethernet electrical interfaces are connected with electrical CAT6A SFTP 4-pair cables
terminated with RJ-45 connectors.

CAUTION: Intra-building Ethernet ports of the equipment or subassembly must use shielded
intra-building cabling/wiring that is grounded on both ends.

3.4.6 Optical fibers


Optical fibers can be prepared on site.
Use only 2 mm optical fibers to connect to optical interfaces. For each optical interface, patch cords are
supplied with mating optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical
termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed on site.
The optical fibers enter the rack from the top, are threaded through cable guides running along the rack
side rails, and end at the FST. The tray must contain enough fiber length for extracting modules from the
OPT9608 and for replacing fiber in case of damage (splicing repairs). Make sure to observe the minimum
bending radius (35 mm) when routing fibers.
The following table lists the type of fibers and mating connectors needed to prepare fibers for each
OPT9608 module/card.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Table 3-4: Optical fibers and mating connector data

I/O module/card Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty/Module/Card


connector
RCP1_4AD_T GbE/FE 1 pair of single mode, or LC male
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
TR10_4 10GbE 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 8 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
FIO10_5 10GbE 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 10 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
AOC10 GbE/FE 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 36 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
FIOMR_16 GbE/FE 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 32 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
REG40 STM256 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 4 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
CMB40 10GbE 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 6 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
FIO40 OTU3 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 2 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
TR100 100GbE 1 pair of single mode, or LC male 4 fibers
multimode (depending on
the transceiver type) fiber
patch cords
FOADM2_xx 1 pair of single mode LC male 8 fibers
FOADM4_xx 1 pair of single mode LC male
MXD88 1 pair of single mode LC male 178 fibers
MXD44 1 pair of single mode LC male 90 fibers
MXD48_P 1 pair of single mode LC male 98 fibers

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

I/O module/card Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty/Module/Card


connector
MXD96_P 1 pair of single mode LC male 194 fibers
FOADM850_xx 1 pair of single mode LC male 20 fibers
OADMC4_xx 1 pair of single mode LC male 12 fibers
OADMC8_xx 1 pair of single mode LC male 20 fibers
ROADM_9A50 1 pair of single mode LC male 20 fibers
ROADM_2A50 1 pair of single mode LC male 6 fibers
ROADM_2A 1 pair of single mode LC male 6 fibers
ROADM_9A 1 pair of single mode LC male 20 fibers
TFA_8 1 pair of single mode LC male 26 fibers
DCF652_5 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_10 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_20 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_30 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_40 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_50 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_60 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_70 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_80 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_90 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_100 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_110 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF652_120 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF655_40 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF655_80 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
DCF655_120 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
OA_PA 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
OA_FB 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
OA_FHBS 1 pair of single mode LC male 2 fibers
OA_ML 1 pair of single mode LC male 4 fibers
OA_M 1 pair of single mode LC male 4 fibers
OA_MHS 1 pair of single mode LC male 4 fibers
OA_HRM 1 pair of single mode LC male 4 fibers
OSC 1 pair of single mode LC male 16 fibers
CT_1510_2 1 pair of single mode LC male 12 fibers

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

I/O module/card Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty/Module/Card


connector
CT_1310_2 1 pair of single mode LC male 12 fibers
1 pair of single mode LC male 12 fibers
SP_SM_4
SP_MM_4 1 pair of single mode LC male 12 fibers
SP_CE_2 1 pair of single mode LC male 6 fibers

3.5 OPT9608 accessories


The following accessories are available for efficient and optimal installation of equipment in racks. For
custom modifications to standard items, contact Customer Support or your local sales representative.

3.5.1 RAP units


RAP units provide DC power and alarm functionality for the operation of telecommunication platforms.
There are three RAPs suitable for the OPT96xx platforms:
 xRAP-100
 RAP-4B
 RAP-E
xRAP-100 and RAP-4B units can feed up to four OPT96xx platforms and has similar alarm severity and alarm
I/O support. The xRAP-100 can supply a maximum of 5.2 kW of DC power, and the RAP-4B a maximum of
4.4 kW. The xRAP-100 output power for feeding the platforms is provided through three 3-pin and one 5-
pin D-type connectors, and in the RAP-4B through four sets of terminals. RAP-E units can feed up to two
OPT9608 platforms and has similar alarm severity and alarm I/O support. The RAP-E can supply a maximum
of 9 kW of DC power. The RAP-E output power for feeding the platforms is provided through 5-pin D-type
connectors.
For a detailed description of the RAPs see xRAP-100, RAP-4B and RAP-E.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.5.1.1 xRAP-100
The xRAP-100 is a power distribution and alarm panel for Apollo 96xx product line platforms installed in
racks.
The xRAP-100 performs the following main functions:
 Power distribution for up to four platforms: The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC or -60 VDC.
The xRAP-100 supports connection to two separate DC power sources, where one is the main power
input (A) and the second is an optional protective backup power input (B). This enables power source
redundancy to platforms that support this feature. The CB rating installed in the xRAP-100 for feeding
a single platform is max. 35 A. The total power that can be provided by the xRAP-100 is max. 5.2 kW.
Figure 3-3: xRAP-100 power supply flow

Each power source can be connected to the xRAP-100 with a dual input line; we will designate this
option as dual input power cable configuration (for feeding platforms like the 9600 series). However,
in the default configuration, the xRAP-100 is supplied with bridge components, connecting the
negative terminals of the two power input lines. This enables users to connect the unit with an up to
50 mm2 single input power cable. When feeding with dual input power cable configuration is
preferred, the bridge components must be removed.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-15


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Power is connected through four independent circuit breakers to three 3-pin, and one 5-pin output
connectors for feeding the platforms. The total power that can be provided by the unit is 5.2 kW
maximum. The power is equally distributed via each input power line; 2600 W to two 3-pin
connectors (up to 1300 W per platform), and 2600 W to the third 3-pin and to the 5-pin connectors.
The 5-pin output power connector can feed a high-power platform (for example, XDM-1000 requiring
2200 W). In such a case, the third 3-pin connector is able to provide the rest of the power (in this
example, 2600 - 2200 = 400 W). It is recommended not to use the third 3-pin connector when a high-
power platform is connected.

NOTE: The xRAP-100 can provide power to four OPT96xx platforms. In this case, three of
them are connected to the 3-pin, and one to the 5-pin D-type connectors.

Note that with the dual input cable configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply
sources to the xRAP-100 do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do not
have to be more than 32A, except for the circuit breaker connected to the 5-pin connector that can
be up to 65A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2600 W. The
xRAP-100 reflects the response to the need of customers who are not able to support 50 mm2 feeding
power cables when connecting four platforms.

NOTE: Users who prefer to work with a single power cable from their main power supply (and
optionally, a single power cable from the protective power supply) can still work with a single
cable if they:
 Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support two platforms only, with a maximum
of 2600 W for both platforms, where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1300 W
per platform.
 Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support four platforms, where each platform
is limited to a maximum of 650 W per platform. This configuration option requires the
use of the metal bridge component supplied for this purpose.
 Work with a single 50 mm2 power cable to support four platforms with a maximum of
1300 W for each platform. This configuration option requires the use of the metal bridge
component supplied for this purpose.

The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, ranging to -72 VDC. The internal circuits of the xRAP-100
are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the
xRAP-100 is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker that also serves as a power
on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements. To prevent accidentally changing a circuit breaker state, the circuit
breakers can be reached only after removing the xRAP-100 front cover. The circuit breaker state
(ON/OFF) can be seen through openings in the cover.

NOTE: For connecting an OPT96xx series platform to the 5-pin connector, use a 5-pin D-type
male to 2-pin D-type female cable.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-16


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

 Bay alarm indications: The xRAP-100 includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light
simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major alarm in an OPT96xx series platform is connected to the xRAP-
100.
 Connection of alarms from up to four supported platforms, each with maximum four alarm inputs
and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-100, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
Figure 3-4: xRAP-100 front panel

Table 3-5: xRAP-100 front panel component functions

No. Designation Function


1 SOURCE A Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 –
one per platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as
ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source
A.
-- Buzzer (concealed Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is
under cover) present in the platforms connected to the xRAP-100.
2 TEST Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for
test purposes.
3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is connected
to the xRAP-100.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the platform connected
to the xRAP-100 is Critical.
5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the platform
connected to the xRAP-100 is Major.
6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the platform
connected to the xRAP-100 is Minor.
7 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-17


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The xRAP-100 connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists
the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.
Figure 3-5: xRAP-100 connectors

Table 3-6: xRAP-100 connectors

No. Designation Function


1, 2, 3, 4 Shelf alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and
SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input and output lines to the platforms and
other equipment installed in the rack
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input and output lines to the
customer alarm monitoring facility
6, 7, 8 Platforms DC Three 3-pin D-type connectors designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 for
input power connecting DC power to regular power platforms
9 Shelf DC input, 5-pin D-type connector designated Shelf 4 for connecting a high or regular
high power power platform

3.5.1.2 RAP-4B
The RAP-4B is a power distribution and alarm panel for Apollo 96xx platforms installed in racks.

NOTE: The RAP-4B supports operation with OPT96xx series platforms.

The RAP-4B performs the following main functions:


 Power distribution for up to four protected platforms installed on the same rack. The nominal DC
power voltage is 48 VDC or 60 VDC. Since the supported platforms can use redundant power sources,
the RAP-4B supports connection to two separate DC power circuits.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power
on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements. The CB rating installed in the RAP-4B for feeding a single platform is
max. 35 A. The total power that can be provided by the RAP-4B is max. 4 x 1.1 kW (4.4 kW).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-18


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

NOTE: The maximum power that can be supplied by the RAP-4B to a single platform is not
more than 1.1 kW.

The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-4B installation. To prevent accidentally changing a
circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after removing the RAP-4B front cover.
The circuit breaker state (ON/OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
 Bay alarm indications: The RAP-4B includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When
alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light
simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major alarm in an OPT96xx series platform is connected to the RAP-
4B.
 Connection of alarms from up to four platforms, each platform with max. four alarm inputs and two
alarm outputs.
Figure 3-6: RAP-4B front panel

Table 3-7: RAP-4B front panel component functions

No. Designation Function


1 SOURCE A Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 –
one per platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as
ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source
A.
--- Buzzer (concealed Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is
under cover) present in the platform connected to the RAP-4B.
2 TEST Pushbutton; pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for
test purposes.
3 POWER Green indicator; lights when at least one DC power source is connected to the
RAP-4B.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the
platform connected to the RAP-4B is Critical.
5 MAJOR Orange indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the
platform connected to the RAP-4B is Major.
6 MINOR Yellow indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the
platform connected to the RAP-4B is Minor.
7 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-19


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Figure 3-7: Rap-4B alarm connectors on the circuit board

Table 3-8: RAP-4B connector functions

No. Designation Function


1, 2, 3, 4 Shelf alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and
SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input/output lines from the platforms to the
RAP-4B.
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input lines from the customer's
equipment to the platforms, and alarm output lines from the platforms to
the customer alarm monitoring facility.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-20


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.5.1.3 RAP-E
The RAP-E is a power distribution and alarm panel for platforms that consume up to 3500 W installed in
racks.
The RAP-E performs the following main functions:
 Redundant power distribution for two platforms. The RAP-E can support either one or two
platforms. Each platform works with two power sources, where one is the main source (A) and the
second is an optional protective backup source (B).
In the default configuration, the RAP-E supplies independent streams of power to two separate
platforms. Input power for one platform is kept completely separate from the input power for the
second. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers
on the RAP-E unit. (There are a total of eight circuit breakers on the RAP-E, supporting redundant
power supplies for up to two platforms.). The power supply flow for two platforms is illustrated in the
following figure.
Figure 3-8: RAP-E typical power connection to two OPT9624 platforms

The RAP-E has eight 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to the supported
platforms (in this case, OPT9624). The maximum power supplied to each platform is up to 3500W, in
accordance with the platform type.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-21


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Note that with the default configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply sources to
the RAP-E do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do not have to be more
than 50A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2250 W.
 Redundant power distribution for one platform. The RAP-E can support power supply to one
platform. In this case the platform works with two power sources, where one is the main source (A)
and the second is an optional protective backup source (B). Separate input power cables from the
power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the RAP-E unit. (In this configuration there
are a total of four circuit breakers on the RAP-E, supporting redundant power supplies for one
platform). The power supply flow for a single platform is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-9: RAP-E redundancy connections to a single OPT9608

NOTE: The following connection options are possible:


 Optimal power connection - work with four 25 mm2 power cables to support two
OPT9624 platforms, with maximum power of 3500 W each. Or, work with two 25 mm2
power cables to support one OPT9624 platform, with a maximum of 3500 W.

The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, ranging to -72 VDC. The internal circuits of the RAP-E are
powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the
RAP-E is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by two circuit breakers that also serve as a power
on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with
the order requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-22


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-E installation. To prevent accidental changing of a
circuit breaker’s state, the circuit breakers can be reached easily after opening the front cover of the
RAP-E. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through openings in the RAP-E cover.
 Bay alarm indications. The RAP-E includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When
alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications light
simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the RAP-E. The buzzer
can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform. This action does not clear
the alarm.
 Connecting external alarms from two platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs
and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts) to the customer's central alarm monitoring system.
Customers who wish to define external alarms should refer to the explanation of the dry contacts
electrical maximum rating requirements for external alarms in the System Specification.
Note that the RAP-E supports up to eight input and output external alarms. These alarms are
allocated four to each platform.
 Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms: a group of four for each platform
(Critical, Major, Minor, and buzzer) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm
monitoring system.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-E, and the table lists the functions of the front panel
components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
Figure 3-10: RAP-E front panel

Table 3-9: RAP-E front panel component functions

No. Designation Function


1 SOURCE A
Opening for the four circuit breakers (two per OPT9608 platform
installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power
switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.
2 TEST Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on
for test purposes.
3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is
connected to the RAP-E.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in
the platforms connected to the RAP-E is Critical.
5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the RAP-E is Major.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-23


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

No. Designation Function


6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in
the platforms connected to the RAP-E is Minor.
7 Buzzer (concealed Operates when a specific alarm (e.g. Major, Critical etc.) is designated.
under cover)
8 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.

The RAP-E connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the
connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figures.
Figure 3-11: RAP-E connectors

Table 3-10: RAP-E connector functions

No. Designation Function


1, 2, 3, 4 Output 1, Output 2,
Four 5-pin D-type connectors, designated Output 1, Output 2,
Output 3, and Output 4
Output 3, and Output 4, used to connect DC power to the
DC output power
OPT9608 platforms.
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the
customer alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits
the alarms received from the OPT9608 platforms by the SHELF 1
and SHELF 2 connectors, including external alarm inputs,
external alarm outputs, and OPT9608 severity alarms.
6, 7 SHELF 1 and SHELF 2 Two 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1 and SHELF 2,
used to connect alarm cables to the OPT9608 platforms
installed in the rack. These cables transmit alarms from the
OPT9608 platform to the RAP-E unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-24


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.5.2 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system


The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system is a high efficient and extreme compact system that provides an
optimal solution for space-critical, low power telecommunication applications, requiring flexible DC power
supplies.
The main components of the power system are three rectifier units, each capable of supplying up to 850 W
at a nominal voltage of 48 VDC.
Each power system includes three DPR-850B-48 rectifier units, an CSU-502 controller unit, two battery
circuit breakers, and six load circuit breakers, all enclosed in an 437.4 x 270 x 43.4 mm (W x D x H)
miniature platform. All connections to the system are made from the rear of the unit.
The rectifiers are connected in parallel in a redundant (n+1) load-sharing mode. The current-sharing mode
enables each rectifier to supply an equal load current, thus increasing system reliability. In case a failure
occurs in one of the units, the current drawn from the other rectifiers is increased to supply the required
load current. The DPR-850B-48 is designed for online replacement (hot-swappable) to support
non-traffic-affecting operation of telecommunication equipment.
In addition, to support high availability, the system has an option to connect backup batteries. In this case,
while the system is operating normally it also charges the batteries in addition to supplying power to the
load. If the AC source fails, the batteries, which are connected on the rectifier output bus, supply the load
current.
The state-of-the-art power supply is designed to match constant-power characteristics of modern telecom
loads, and thus reduces the number of rectifiers required in battery backed-up systems. The AC/DC-
DPS850-48-3 features a modular architecture for easy system maintenance and repair.
Figure 3-12: AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system, general view

The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 system has connectors for connecting the load, batteries, AC source, and the
system alarms, at the rear of the unit. It also includes circuit breakers that protect the power supply against
load overcurrent at the battery and rectifier outputs.
The CSU-502 module provides control and monitoring functions. It is supplied preconfigured, ready for
immediate use. It supports system voltage, load current, status, and alarms that can be changed and
displayed on the LCD display.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 platform is preconfigured for fast installation and setup. All system settings are
fully software-configured and stored in transferable configuration files for repeated one-step system setup.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 platform is supplied with two kits of brackets for installation in 19" or ETSI racks.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-25


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The following main features are supported by the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system:
 19"/ETSI power platform for 48 VDC @ 2250 W (max.) in non-redundant application
 Single phase 100-240 VAC input source
 Three DPR-850B-48 rectifier units
 Light weight plug-in modules for simple installation and maintenance
 Hot swappable rectifier and control modules
 Front access to the circuit breakers and control module for simplified operation and maintenance

3.5.2.1 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view


The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-13: AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view

The following table describes the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view components.

Table 3-11: AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front component functions

Designation Component Function


LD1 to LD6 Load DC voltage circuit Act as ON/OFF switches for connecting loads LD1 to LD6 to
breakers. Ratings: the system DC voltage bus. Protect the system from load
LD1, LD2 = 12 A overcurrent.
LD3, LD4 = 20 A
LD5, LD6 = 30 A
BAT1, BAT2 Battery circuit breakers, 50 Act as ON/OFF switches for connecting two battery systems
A each to the DC voltage bus. Protect the system from battery
overload.
Controller unit Provides control, provisioning, configuration, and display for
CSU-502
the system.
SNMP Remote control connector, Provides SNMP communication with the CSU 502 for
interface RJ-45 (optional per order) controlling the system from remote (via a modem).
DPR-850B-48 Rectifier unit 850 W
Provides AC to DC power conversion for the system. Up to
three units can be installed in a platform. The system max.
power is 2250 W.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-26


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.5.2.2 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear view


The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 general rear view is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-14: AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 general rear view

To enable understanding enlarged views of sections on the rear panel are provided in the following figures.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 detailed battery and load connections are shown in the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-27


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 AC source and alarm connections are shown in the following figure.

The following table describers the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear panel component functions (connections).

Table 3-12: AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear panel component functions

Designation Component Function


TA RJ-45 connector Connects the Ambient temperature sensor to the system. The
sensor with an appropriate cable is supplied, by default, with the
system. If not connected, Ambient Temperature will not affect the
power supply control system.
TB RJ-45 connector Connects the BAT1 temperature sensor to the system. The sensor
with an appropriate cable is supplied, by default, with the system.
It must be connected, in case backup batteries are used.
LOAD1 to Screw terminal Each terminal provides load connection to the system DC output
LOAD6 socket, 2-positions (6 bus. The recommended cable cross-section for connecting the
places) loads are:
 LOAD1 and LOAD2, AWG 14 (2.5 mm2)
 LOAD3 and LOAD4, AWG 12 (4 mm2)
 LOAD5 and LOAD6, AWG 10 (10 mm2).
BAT 2 and Screw terminal Connects the corresponding BAT 2 and BAT 1 battery packs to the
BAT 1 socket, 2-positions (2 system DC output bus. The recommended cable cross-section for
places) connecting the each battery pack is AWG 6 (16 mm2).
ALARM D-type, 26-pin, Connects the Systems alarm output signals. The signals are
SIGNAL female connector delivered by six sets of relay dry contacts.
PE, L, N, Terminal socket, Connects the AC source input voltage to the system:
3-positions  PE - Ground
 L - Line
 N - Neutral
The connections must be made with 3 x AWG 14 (2.5 mm2) cables.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-28


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.5.3 Power Distribution Units (PDU)


The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is a family of devices that can provide power to loads with up to 12 kW
power consumption. PDU55AL and PDU77AL also support alarms interface connections.
The PDU family consists of the following units:
 PDU55AL - distributing power for up to 5 loads with 2.4 kW each, including alarms support.
 PDU77AL - distributing power for up to 7 loads, including three loads with 2.4 kW each and 4 with
1200 W each, and including alarms support.
 PDU99 - distributing power for up to 9 loads with up to 2.4 kW each and 12 kW in total, including
circuit breaker tripped alarm support.
The PDU units all have a similar electrical design and differ only in the number of loads that they can feed.
PDU55AL and PDU77AL units have an identical alarms module that provides the alarm functionality. The
PDU99 unit has an integrated CB Tripped alarm circuit.

NOTE: In this manual the generic name PDU or PDUxx is used to describe features and
functions that are common to all three PDU55AL, PDU77AL, and PDU99 units.

A front cover protects the access to the PDU's terminal blocks, power connectors, and circuit breakers. To
gain access to the parts in the PDU this cover must be removed.

NOTE: Maximum operating temperature of the PDU units is 45°C.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-29


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The following figure show a general view of the PDU55AL (the general view of the PDU77AL is similar).
PDU99 has a cover without LEDs.
Figure 3-15: PDU55AL general view

3.5.3.1 PDU55AL
The PDU55AL is a power distribution unit installed in racks for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12 kW.
The PDU55AL performs the following main functions:
 Redundant power distribution for five loads consuming up to 12 kW. The PDU55AL can supply
power to five loads, each with a power consumption of up to 2400 W. Each load works with two
power sources, where one is the main source (A) and the second is an optional protective backup
source (B).
 Bay alarm indications. The PDU55AL includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications
light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the PDU55AL. The
buzzer can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform (xTAM card). This
action doesn't clear the alarm.
 Connecting external alarms from three platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs,
totaling up to 12 alarm inputs in the PDU55AL. Alarm inputs are implemented by optocoupler circuits.
The PDU55AL also supports up to 8 alarm outputs, implemented by relay dry contacts, each with NO
and NC positions. Four alarm outputs are allocated to SHELF 1. SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 have 2 alarm
outputs each.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-30


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

 Exporting severity alarms. Three separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical, Major,
Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm
monitoring system.
 Feeding cables and wiring. Use proper two hole ring terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding
connections. Crimp the terminal using proper crimp tools. Add a shrink tube on the neck of each ring
terminal to prevent touching the wiring by accident. Tighten the nuts securely on the PDU connectors
using a ratchet and 10mm socket.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector as this may cause
damage.

 Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU connectors and
secure two flat screws with a flat screwdriver.
The PDU55AL terminal blocks, connectors, and circuit breakers are located on its main board, as shown in
the following figure. The table lists the component functions. The marking in the table correspond to those
in the figures.

NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU55AL. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.

Figure 3-16: PDU55AL main board

Table 3-13: PDU55AL main board component functions

Marking Designation Function


1, 2, 3, 4, 5 DC output power connectors Five 5W5 connectors for connecting DC power to the
Apollo 96xx platforms (loads) with a power consumption
of up to 2400 W.
Circuit breakers Five circuit breaker sockets for inserting (typical 60 A) CBs
A1 to A5
to protect the loads connected to the corresponding
output connectors.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-31


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Marking Designation Function


A1 to A5 DC input power terminals For connecting the DC input power to the PDU55AL.
A1 to A5 LED indicators Five Green LEDs. When a LED lights it indicates the
presence of DC input power in the corresponding input
power terminals.

The following figure shows the PDUxxAL Alarms board, and the table lists the functions of the components
corresponding to the figure.
Figure 3-17: PDUxxAL alarm board

Table 3-14: PDUxxAL alarms board component functions

Designation Function
SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3 Three 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and SHELF
3 used to connect alarm cables to the Apollo 96xx platforms installed in
the rack. These cables transmit alarms from the Apollo 96xx platform
to the PDUxxAL unit.
ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the customer
alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the alarms
received from the Apollo 96xx platforms by the SHELF 1, SHELF 2 and
SHELF 3 connectors, including external alarm inputs, external alarm
outputs, and Apollo 96xx severity alarms.
TEST Pushbutton for activating the buzzer and turning on the indicators for
test purposes.
ON (power) Green indicator, lights when at least one DC power source is connected
to the PDUxxAL.
CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in
the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Critical.
MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Major.
MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Minor.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-32


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

PDU55AL power supply flow example


An example of the power supply flow for an OPT9914 platform and an OPT9624 is illustrated in the
following figure. This configuration uses three DC outputs to feed the three xPFM-14 (A) and (B) pairs of the
OPT9914. The two other outputs feed the two PFM24 (A) and (B) units of the OPT9624.
Figure 3-18: PDU55AL power supply flow example

The PDU55AL supplies independent streams of power to five separate loads. Input power circuits (A1 to A5)
for each load is kept completely separate from the input power for the others. Separate input power cables
from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the PDU55AL. (There are a total of ten
circuit breakers on the PDU55AL, supporting redundant power supplies for up to five loads).
The PDU55AL has ten 5W5 DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to the supported
platforms (OPT9914, OPT9624, OPT9608). The maximum power supplied to each output is up to 2400 W.
The connection of the power sources to the PDU55AL is made through ten pairs of 35 mm 2 power cables
from the user's power supply sources (five for each source) and circuit breakers do not have to be more
than 60 A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2400 W.
Each input circuit is monitored by a LED. The ten LEDs, located at the middle of the main board, enable the
user to view the status of each input circuit at a glance. This saves the need to connect test equipment, in
case troubleshooting is required.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-33


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC however the input voltage can range from -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC.
The internal circuits of the PDU55AL are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore
their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

3.5.3.2 PDU77AL
The PDU77AL is a power distribution unit installed in the rack for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12
kW.
The PDU77AL performs the following main functions:
 Redundant power distribution for seven loads consuming up to 12 kW. The PDU77AL can supply
power to seven loads, three with a power consumption of up to 2400 W and four with a power
consumption of up to 1200 W each. Each load works with two power sources, where one is the main
source (A) and the second is an optional protective backup source (B).
 Bay alarm indications. The PDU77AL includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications
light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the PDU77AL. The
buzzer can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform (xTAM card). This
action doesn't clear the alarm.
 Connecting external alarms from three platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs,
totaling up to 12 alarm inputs in the PDU77AL. Alarm inputs are implemented by optocoupler circuits.
The PDU77AL also supports up to 8 alarm outputs, implemented by relay dry contacts, each with NO
and NC positions. Four alarm outputs are allocated to SHELF 1. SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 have 2 alarm
outputs each.
 Exporting severity alarms. Three separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical, Major,
Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm
monitoring system.
 Feeding cables and wiring. Use proper two hole ring terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding
connections. Crimp the terminal using proper crimp tools. Add a shrink tube on the neck of each ring
terminal to prevent touching the wiring by accident. Tighten the nuts securely on the PDU connectors
using a ratchet and 10mm socket.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector as this may cause
damage.

 Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU connectors and
secure two flat screws with a flat screwdriver.
The following figure shows the front panel of the PDUxxAL, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callouts.

NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU77AL. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-34


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Figure 3-19: PDU77AL main board

Table 3-15: PDU77AL main board component functions

Marking Designation Function


1, 2, 3, DC output power connectors Three 5W5 connectors for connecting DC power to the
Apollo 96xx platforms (loads) with a power consumption
of up to 2400 W.
4, 5, 6, 7 DC output power terminal blocks. Four three pin terminal blocks for connecting DC power
to the Apollo 96xx platforms (loads) with a power
consumption of up to 1200 W. .
Circuit breakers sockets (type A) Three circuit breaker sockets for inserting (typical 60 A)
A1 to A3
CBs to protect the loads connected to the corresponding
output connectors.
C1 to C4 Circuit breakers sockets (type B) Four circuit breaker sockets for inserting (typical 30 A)
CBs to protect the loads connected to the corresponding
output terminal blocks.
A1 to A5 DC input power terminals For connecting the DC input power to the PDU77AL.
A1 to A5 LED indicators Five Green LEDs. When a LED lights it indicates the
presence of DC input power in the corresponding input
power terminals.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-35


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The following figure shows the PDUxxAL Alarms board, and the table lists the functions of the components
corresponding to the figure.
Figure 3-20: PDUxxAL alarm board

Table 3-16: PDUxxAL alarms board component functions

Designation Function
SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3 Three 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and SHELF
3 used to connect alarm cables to the Apollo 96xx platforms installed in
the rack. These cables transmit alarms from the Apollo 96xx platform
to the PDUxxAL unit.
ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the customer
alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the alarms
received from the Apollo 96xx platforms by the SHELF 1, SHELF 2 and
SHELF 3 connectors, including external alarm inputs, external alarm
outputs, and Apollo 96xx severity alarms.
TEST Pushbutton for activating the buzzer and turning on the indicators for
test purposes.
ON (power) Green indicator, lights when at least one DC power source is connected
to the PDUxxAL.
CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in
the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Critical.
MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Major.
MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Minor.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-36


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

PDU77AL power supply flow example


The PDU77AL supplies independent streams of power to three separate loads from three (A1 to A3) out of
the five input circuits. Input power for each load is kept completely separate from the input power for the
others. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the
PDU77AL. The maximum power supplied to each output is up to 2400 W. The circuit breaker rating for this
power is 60 A. The backup for these outputs is via input circuits (B1 to B3) and the corresponding output
connectors of Source B.
The two other input power circuits (A4 and A5) supply power to four loads as follows:
 The input A4 splits to two output terminals blocks C1, C2 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).
 The input A5 splits to two output terminals blocks C3, C4 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).
The backup circuits (B4 and B5) supply power to four corresponding loads as follows:
 The input B4 splits to two output terminals blocks D1, D2 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).
 The input B5 splits to two output terminals blocks D3, D4 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-37


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

An example of the power supply flow for OPT9914, OPT9603 and OPT9608 platforms is illustrated in the
following figure. This configuration uses three DC outputs to feed the three xPFM-14 (A) and (B) pairs of the
OPT9914. The other outputs (connecting through terminal blocks) are used to feed the two PFM units of
two OPT9608 (A) and (B) and a PFM03 of a OPT9603 (A) and (B).
Figure 3-21: PDU77AL power supply flow example

Each input circuit is monitored by a LED. The ten LEDs, located at the middle of the main board, enable the
user to view the status of each input circuit at a glance. This saves the need to connect test equipment, in
case troubleshooting is required.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC however the input voltage can range from -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC.
The internal circuits of the PDU77AL are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore
their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-38


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.5.3.3 PDU99
The PDU99 is a power distribution unit installed in the racks for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12
kW.
Figure 3-22: PDU99 general view

NOTE: Maximum operating temperature of the PDU99 unit is 45°C.

WARNINGS:
 PDU99 must be installed only above concrete or other non-combustible surfaces.
 Only trained, qualified personel should install, maintain, or replace the PDU99.

The PDU99 performs the following main functions:


 Redundant power distribution for nine loads consuming up to 12 kW: The PDU99 can supply power
to nine loads, with a power consumption of up to 2400 W.
 Alarm indications: The PDU99 includes alarm indication of a tripped circuit breaker by a Red LED and
a dry contact per source. The Red LED and the corresponding relay activates only if there is a load
connected to the relevant circuit breakers.
 Feeding cables and wiring: Use proper two hole lug terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding connections.
 Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU terminal block
connectors and secure two flat screws for each equipment (+/-) with a flat screwdriver.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-39


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The PDU99 can be powered with either:


 Single wire connection from an external power supply, using one terminal lug LCDX3/0-14AH-X to the
PDU99 input
or
 Two wire connection from an external power supply, using two terminal lugs LCDX1/0-14AH-X to the
PDU99 input.

To connect cables and wiring:


1. Crimp the terminal using proper crimp tools
2. Add a shrink tube on the neck of each lug terminal to prevent touching the wiring by accident.
3. Tighten the nuts securely on the PDU connectors using a ratchet and 10mm socket.
Each load works with two power sources, where one is the main source (A) and the second is an optional
protective backup source (B). The PDU99 supplies independent streams of power to nine separate loads
(A1 to A9). Output for each load is kept completely separate per each load. There are only two input power
cables (1x150 mm2 or 2x50 mm2) for each power source (A and B), four in total. They feed all of the nine
circuit breakers. The total power of 12 kW can be distributed between the 9 available loads. If 5 loads
consume 2.4 kW each, the maximum power capability is reached. In that case no additional loads can be
fed. The circuit breaker rating for this power is 60 A. The backup for these outputs is via input circuits (B1 to
B9) and the corresponding output terminal blocks of Source B.

IMPORTANT: When connecting the input power cable to the PDU99 you must use a shrink
tubing to isolate the neck of the ring terminal and a protective conductor.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector as this may cause
damage.

The TUV CE label for the module operated from a DC source is shown in the following figure:
Figure 3-23: PDU99 TUV CE label

The following figure shows the front panel of the PDU99, and the table lists the functions of the front panel
components corresponding to the figure callouts. Front panel components are accessed by lifting the
PDU99 front cover.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-40


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU99. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.

Figure 3-24: PDU99 main board front view

Table 3-17: PDU99 main board component functions

Marking Designation Function


1 to 9 DC output power terminal Nine power terminal pairs for connecting DC power to the
blocks OPT9608 platforms (loads) with a power consumption of
up to 2400 W. Up to 5x60A connections on each source.
A1 to A9 Circuit breakers sockets Nine circuit breaker sockets for inserting CBs to protect the
(source A) loads connected to the corresponding output connectors.
The CB should be up to 60 A each and up to 300 A in total.
Ds 1 LED indicators Two green LEDs. LED lights ON indicates the presence of
Ds 2 DC input power in the corresponding input power source.
Ds 1 is for source A and ds 2 is for source B.
Ds 3 LED indicators Two red LEDs. LED lights ON indicates that one of the
Ds 4 circuit breakers is tripped. Ds 3 indicates source A CB fell
and ds 4 indicates that source B CB fell.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-41


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Figure 3-25: PDU99 main board back view

Table 3-18: PDU99 main board component functions

Marking Designation Function


A1 to A4 DC input power terminals Terminals for connecting the DC input power to the
PDU99.

Figure 3-25: WŽǁĞƌĂŶĚPDU99 ĐĂďůŝŶŐͬǁŝƌŝŶŐĚŝĂŐƌĂŵ

dŚĞƉŽƐŝƚŝǀĞǁŝƌĞŝƐŐƌŽƵŶĚĞĚĂƐƐŚŽǁŶŝŶƚŚĞĚŝĂŐƌĂŵĂďŽǀĞ.

To disconnect the PDU99:


1. Set the switch of the external power source to OFF position. Make sure that external power source
feeding power to the PDU99 device is easily accessible.
2. Disconnect the circuit breaker on the PDU99.
3. Unplug the DC source from the external source by loosening the nuts with a ratchet and a 10mm
socket.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-42


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

PDU99 power supply flow example


An example of the power supply flow for an OPT9914 platform and an OPT9624 is illustrated in the
following figure. This configuration uses three DC outputs to feed the three xPFM-14 (A) and (B) pairs of the
OPT9914. The two other outputs feed the two PFM24 (A) and (B) units of the OPT9624. PDU99 can
distribute power to all types of ECI platforms as well as 3rd party products.
Figure 3-26: PDU99 power supply flow example

Each input source is monitored by a green LED. The two LEDs, located at the middle of the main board,
enable the user to view the status of each input source.
The nominal DC power voltage is 48 VDC, however the input voltage can range from -40.5 VDC to 60 VDC.
The internal circuits of the PDU99 are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore
their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-43


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.6 Equipment rack installation


The following sections provide detailed instructions for installing the equipment racks in various settings.

3.6.1 Mark the rack floor


You must mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.

1. Find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.


2. If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do it now (see Unpacking and
performing visual inspection).

To mark out the rack floor plan:


1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the floor plan template
corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
 ETSI – use the template shown in Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (diagram a).
 23 in. – use the template shown in Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks (diagram a).
 19 in. – use the template shown in Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks (diagram b).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.
2. If the installation is located at a site with a raised floor, mark out all cable entry slots as well.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for equipment bolting.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-44


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Figure 3-27: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-45


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Figure 3-28: Mounting diagram for 19 in. and 23 in. racks

3.6.2 Install the rack on a concrete floor

See the relevant diagrams in the Mark the rack floor section when performing this procedure.

To install the rack on a concrete floor:


1. Plan where to drill holes by referring to the appropriate template figure. Choose the relevant
template sketch from the diagrams included in Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (diagram a) and
Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks (diagram a or b).
2. Drill the mounting holes using a 5 mm (0.2 in.) drill bit.
3. Insert expansion shields into the holes.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-46


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

4. Position the rack over the mounting holes.


Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit (see diagram b of Mounting
diagrams for ETSI racks or diagram c of Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks).

NOTE: ETSI racks have leveling points that can be adjusted after installation to compensate
for an uneven floor.

3.6.3 Install the rack on a wooden floor

See the relevant diagrams in the Mark the rack floor section when performing this procedure.

To mount the rack on a wooden floor:


1. Plan where to drill holes by referring to the appropriate template figure. Choose the relevant
template sketch from the diagrams included in Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (diagram a) and
Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks (diagram a or b).
2. Drill the mounting holes using a 5 mm (0.2 in.) drill bit.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
Secure the rack to the floor using appropriate wood screws (refer to diagram d of Mounting diagrams for
ETSI racks).

3.6.4 Install the rack on a raised floor

See the relevant diagrams in the Mark the rack floor section when performing this procedure.

To mount the rack on a raised floor:


1. Plan where to drill holes by referring to the appropriate template figure. Choose the relevant
template sketch from the diagrams included in Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (diagram a) and
Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks (diagram a or b).
2. Drill the mounting holes using a 5 mm (0.2 in.) drill bit.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
Secure the rack to the floor (see diagram c of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-47


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.6.5 Attach the suspended overhead tray

See the relevant diagrams in the Mark the rack floor section when performing this procedure.

To attach the suspended overhead tray on a rack:


1. Refer to the following suspended overhead tray diagram and position the overhead rack securing
brackets.

2. Secure the overhead cabling trays to the rack using the adjustable brackets. Note that 2200 mm
(87 in.) high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm (102.5 in.) racks are generally
attached only to the ceiling.

3.6.6 Install the extendable rails


In high-density installations it is necessary to install the xRAP above the rack, using the extendable
installation rails.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before starting the equipment
installation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-48


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.6.7 Ground the rack


Immediately after installing the rack, ground the rack as described here. The optical rack grounding points
are illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-29: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post

Use a grounding cable that meets the grounding requirements listed in Rack grounding requirements and
prepared appropriately, based on the instructions in Grounding cables. The relevant accessory washers
(both flat and serrated), nuts, and bolts are delivered attached to the corresponding grounding points.
The rack is delivered with one grounding connection already in place. This is a metal panel that connects
the rack grounding stud to the first grounding point on the far left side of the rack grounding bar.

To ground the rack:


1. Verify that the metal panel is in place and tightened.
2. Tighten the nut over the lug on the rack grounding stud, and the bolt over the grounding point in the
rack grounding bar with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.
3. Use the grounding cable to connect the first pair of grounding points on the left side of the rack
grounding bar to the site grounding bar.
4. Hold the cable lug against the panel and place the flat washer above the cable lug.
5. To secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding bar, place the serrated lock washer on the flat
washer above the cable lug.
6. Screw in the bolt to hold everything in place.
7. Tighten the bolt with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-49


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

WARNINGS:
 To prevent possible damage to Apollo 96xx equipment, all racks and equipment must be
completely grounded before connecting any external devices powered from any DC or
AC source (100 V to 230 V) to the platform. All grounding procedures described in
Grounding the platform must be completed before, for example, connecting an external
PC to configure and initialize the NE management system.
 The thickness of the protecting grounding cable must be at least the same thickness as
the corresponding power cable. This means:
 The thickness of the rack grounding cable must at least match the thickness of the RAP
power cable.
 The thickness of the platform grounding cable must at least match the thickness of the
power cable from the RAP to the platform.
 For more information, see Grounding cables.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-50


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.7 Equipment installation


The following sections describe how to install the OPT9608 and auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for replacing and upgrading equipment are similar to those for installing the equipment.
When relevant, notes regarding live replacement or upgrade are inserted in these procedures.
Use the information in these sections in conjunction with specific site installation plans regarding a
particular customer network. If you are interested in obtaining design or installation assistance from our
Networks Solutions Division’s Customer Support team, or wish to prepare a network installation plan,
contact your sales representative.
The OPT9608 platform, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in the Apollo 96xx Reference
Manual.

3.7.1 Preliminary preparations


The installation procedures provided in this section assume that:
 The sites at which the installation procedures are carried out comply with the requirements listed in
Site preparation.
 The preliminary preparations specified in Installing OPT9608: before you start safety guidelines have
been completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by referring to the site installation
plan, and note the exact position of each unit (to avoid errors, it is recommended to mark the prescribed
positions on the rack rails using a soft pencil).

3.7.2 Installation sequence


Each component of the OPT9608 system is supplied separately and must be installed in the correct
sequence, according to the site plan.
A high-density installation might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure, as follows:
 xRAP-100/RAP-4B rack alarm panel
 Fiber spoolers
 Upper fiber/cable guides
 Lower fiber/cable guides

CAUTION: During the installation of equipment in the rack, make sure all the optical
connectors are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is
connected to the corresponding connector.

Several installation options are illustrated in Platform installation options.


Depending on the specific equipment being installed, the installation of a OPT9608 system might comprise
the following stages, in this order of execution.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-51


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Table 3-19: Outline of OPT9608 installation sequence

Step Procedure Section


1. Install a rack (if required). Installing equipment racks
2. Unpack and perform a visual inspection. Unpacking and performing visual
inspection
3. Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including: Installing ancillary units in racks
 xRAP-100/RAP-4B/RAP-E/PDU
 Fiber spooler
 Upper fiber/cable guides
 Lower fiber/cable guides
4. Install the OPT9608 platform in the rack. Installing the OPT9608 platform in a rack
5. Install the common cards in the OPT9608 platform, Installing OPT9608 cards
including:
 PFM
 FCM including:
 Air filter
6. Install the cards and modules in the OPT9608 Installing single-slot OPT9608 I/O
platform, including: modules
 RCP Installing double-slot OPT9608 I/O
 I/O modules modules
 Service cards
 Passive cards
7. Install blank covers where I/O modules and cards are —
not used.
8. Route and connect all cables and fibers for ETSI Installing and connecting fibers and
optical racks, including: cables
 Power and alarm cables
 Optical fibers to modules transceivers
 Electrical interface cables to electrical modules
 Data cables to modules
 Management cables

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-52


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.7.3 Installation options in ETSI optical rack


You can install OPT9608 platforms in ETSI optical racks in one of the following ways:
 Installing three OPT9608 platforms - typically suitable for OPT9608 platforms with an average 300
fibers each
 Installing four OPT9608 platforms - suitable for OPT9608 platforms with relatively low (up to 160)
fiber count each
 Installing four OPT9608 platforms - suitable for OPT9608 platforms with relatively high (up to 400)
fiber count each
The following sections describe these installation options and the typical accessories required for each.

3.7.4 Outline of installation procedure


The main steps involved in the installation of an OPT9608 platform are listed below. Consult your site
installation plans for specific details.
1. Prepare the site installation as described in Site preparation and check physical location,
environmental compliance, and availability of power sources.
2. Prepare power, alarm, and management cables at the installation site.
3. Prepare transmission cables at the installation site.
4. Route the required power, alarm, management, and transmission cables to the intended OPT9608
equipment location.
5. If required, install the equipment racks.
6. Mark the location of each OPT9608 platform and relevant accessories (fiber spooler, upper
fiber/cable guide, and lower fiber/cable guide) on each rack, according to the site installation plan.
7. When applicable, install the STMS management station (see the STMS User Manual).
8. Install the power distribution and alarm panels – xRAP-100/RAP-4B and other equipment needed in
each rack.
9. Install the OPT9608 platform in the appropriate rack.
10. For each OPT9608 platform using optical modules, install a spooler above the platform and route the
optical fibers to the spooler.
11. Install the RCP card.
12. Install the prescribed I/O cards and modules (electrical interface cards).
13. Install blank panels on slots not used.
14. Depending on the modules in your OPT9608 platform:
 Route the optical fibers to the relevant module connectors.
 Route the Ethernet electrical cables to the corresponding electrical interface card.
15. Connect management cables between the equipment installed in the rack and the management
station.
16. Connect power and alarm monitoring cables from the RAP panels to each OPT9608 installed in the
rack, as described in Connecting power cables and Connecting alarm cables.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-53


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8 Installing ancillary units in racks


Various accessories are available for efficient installation of equipment in racks. Contact Customer Support
or your sales representative for custom modifications to standard items.
This section describes how to install ancillary units. The specific units you need depend on your site
installation plan and may include one or more of the following:
 RAP power distribution frame, usually located at the top of the rack:
 xRAP-100 – see Installing the xRAP-100 , for connection of up to four OPT9608 platforms in the
same rack
OR
 RAP-4B – see Installing the RAP-4B , for connection of up to four OPT9608 platforms in the same
rack
OR
 RAP-E – see Installing the RAP-E , for connection up to four OPT9608 platforms in the same rack
OR
 PDU power distribution unit, usually located at the top of the rack:
 PDU55AL – see Installing the PDUxxAL for connection of a OPT9608 platform and alarms.
 PDU77AL – see Installing the PDUxxAL for connection of a OPT9608 platform and several other
Apollo platforms like OPT9904X in the same rack, and their alarms.
 Upper and lower fiber/cable guides
 Fiber spooler located above the OPT9608 platform accessories, recommended for installations with a
large number of optical modules
 ODF units – see Installing the ODF
 OPP units – see Installing the OPP
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Philips screws. No preparation is
required before installation. The following sections provide mechanical installation instructions for units
that require additional procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.

CAUTION: If additional equipment units other than OPT9608 platforms are used in the rack, a
heat buffer must be installed between any such additional equipment and the OPT9608
platform to minimize the transfer of heat from platform to platform.
Consult with Customer Support for information about the exact heat buffer required.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-54


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.1 Install the xRAP-100


Install the RAP-BG using the following sequence of procedures:

To install the xRAP-100:


1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Attach the xRAP-100 in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the xRAP-100 to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the xRAP-100.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the Apollo 96xx platforms to the xRAP-100.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC power cables.
For a description of the xRAP-100, see the OPT96xx Reference Manual.

3.8.1.1 Prepare DC input power cables


The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the xRAP-100 source A and
source B inputs. When working with the xRAP-100, four sets of cables are typically required, two for each
source.

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead
(+48 V) should be connected with a red cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable.
However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead
(+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable.
In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with
appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.

Each input power cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 25 (or 50) mm2, one
red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole crimping lug from the installation parts kit
supplied with the equipment.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads
are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-55


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

To prepare a DC input power cable:


1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die.
The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720 crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping
tool with D50 die, or equivalent.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
5. Repeat these steps for each DC power cable being used.

3.8.1.2 Attach the xRAP-100


This is the second step in installing the xRAP-100.
The xRAP-100 is attached to the rack side rails in the top position of the rack.

To attach the xRAP-100:


1. Attach the xRAP-100 to the side rails.
2. Secure it with the 4 screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

3.8.1.3 Ground the xRAP-100

NOTE: The xRAP-100 is supplied, by default, with a grounding cable connected to the rear of
the unit. Use this cable to connect ground to the xRAP-100.

To ground the xRAP-100:


1. The xRAP-100 grounding studs are located on its rear cover. Use the following figure to identify these
studs.

If a grounding cable is already attached to the xRAP-100, skip Steps 2 and 3.


2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead (with a two-hole lug) in accordance with the requirements
described in Grounding requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-56


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-100 grounding studs, using spring
washers and nuts.
4. Connect the two-hole lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack's grounding bar.

3.8.1.4 Connecting DC input power cables


The xRAP-100 is supplied, by default, with bridge components assembled on its negative DC power
terminals. This is suitable for connecting the unit to the power source with a single set of cables to support
feeding of up to four platforms.

NOTE: If connection to the source with two separate DC power cable sets is preferred refer to
Connecting DC Input Power Cables without Bridges.

The single power cable is connected to the xRAP-100 through the bridge component. Two connection
variations one with a 25 mm2 and the second with 50 mm2 are illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-30: xRAP-100 power supply with bridge, two variations

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-57


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-100 is able to work with only a single - power cable from
each power source. This supplies enough power to support two 9608 platforms with 2600 W
maximum. In many cases, this configuration is sufficient.
However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all input power cables from all
power sources to the xRAP-100 unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables
from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any later system upgrades, since the
power cables are already in place and ready to supply power to a second pair of platforms, if
the network configuration is ever changed.

Each input power cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 25 (or 50) mm2, one
red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole compression lug from the installation
parts kit supplied with the equipment.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads
are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.

To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100:


1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the xRAP-100 by referring to the
following figure.

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover and remove the cover.
Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in accordance with the
following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the source A side (main); the same board is used
at the source B side (protection).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-58


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The preceding figure shows the electrical connections on the left side of the xRAP-100, the side that
connects to the user's main power supply for the platforms being powered. The right side of the
xRAP-100 contains a mirror image of the connections illustrated in the preceding figure. The right side
connects to the user's (optional) backup protective power supply for the platforms.

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on
the xRAP-100 power terminal board.

3. Unscrew the nuts that come already attached to the negative power terminals.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate xRAP-100 opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive input power stud terminals for shelf 1, marked (+) on the
power terminal board. Note that in this configuration the xRAP-100 works with one set of positive
terminals, used with one power cable. No cable is attached to the second set of positive terminals.
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 938 N
cm to 1062 N cm.
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminals on the bridge unit. Note that in this
configuration the xRAP-100 works with a single set of negative terminals on the bridge unit, used with
one power cables.
8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
9. If an additional backup power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for source B.
Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 (see Grounding
the xRAP-100), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-59


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.1.5 Connecting DC input power cables without bridges


The xRAP-100 is supplied, by default, with bridge units installed on its power input terminals suitable for
feeding the platforms with a single set of cables connected to each source (A and B). If feeding with two
sets of cables from each source is preferred (like for feeding 9600 platforms), you must first remove the
bridge units.
The following procedure describes the removal of these bridges.

To remove the bridge units from the xRAP-100 power terminals:


1. Identify the bridge units and power terminals according to the following figure.

2. Remove the four M6 nuts and four M6 washers fastening the bridge to the DC input power terminals.
Keep the nuts and washers (for connecting the DC cables).
3. Remove the bridge unit.
4. Repeat Steps 2 to and 3 for the second bridge unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-60


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

In the recommended redundant mode with all power cables connected, the xRAP-100 works with four sets
of input power cables.
Figure 3-31: xRAP-100 power supply flow

NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-100 is able to work with only a single 25 mm power cable
2

from each power source. This supplies enough power to support up to 4 platforms with
1100 W, or 2 platforms where each is limited to a maximum of 2000 W per platform.
However, it is recommended if at all possible, upon the initial system installation, to connect
all input power cables from the power sources to the xRAP-100. Connecting all cables from
the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any later system upgrades. The power
cables are already in place and ready to supply power to a second pair of platform if the
network configuration is changed.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-61


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100:


1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the xRAP-100 by referring to the
following figure.

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover and remove the cover.
Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in accordance with the
following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the source A side (main). The same board is used
at the source B side (protection).
Note that there are two complete sets of power terminals and circuit breakers on each side. Separate
input power cables from the user's input power supply feed through the two sets of input power
terminals into the four circuit breakers on the source A side, supplying independent power sources
for up to four platforms (up to 2000 W each). Each circuit breaker feeds into a separate power output
connector for the power cable that connects to the platform.
Similarly, separate input power cables from the user's input power supply feed through separate
input terminals into the four circuit breakers on the source B side, and from the circuit breakers feed
into the additional power output connectors that provide an optional protective backup power supply
for up to four platforms.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-62


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The preceding figure shows the electrical connections on the left side of the xRAP-100, the side that
connects to the user's main power supply for the platforms being powered. The right side of the
xRAP-100 contains a mirror image of the connections illustrated in the preceding figure. The right side
connects to the user's (optional) backup protective power supply.

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on
the xRAP-100 power terminal board.

3. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate xRAP-100 opening.
4. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminals marked (+) on the power terminal board
(set 1).
5. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 938 N
cm to 1062 N cm.
6. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board
(set 1).
7. Repeat Step 5 for the black lead lug.
8. Repeat Step 4 to 7 for connecting power cables to the second pair of power terminals (set 2).
9. If an additional power source (Source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for Source B.
Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 (see Grounding
the xRAP-100), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-63


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.1.6 Connect DC power cables to a platform


Various types of DC power cables connecting platforms to the xRAP-100 are available:
 3-pin D-type to 3-pin D-type cable for regular power platforms
 5-pin D-type to 5-pin D-type cable for high power platforms
 5-pin D-type to 3-pin D-type cable for regular power platforms
 3-pin D-type to 2-pin D-type cable for OPT96xx series platforms
 5-pin D-type to 2-pin D-type cable for OPT96xx series platforms (Shelf 4 position)

To connect the platform DC power cable:


1. Before starting, identify the platform power connectors on the xRAP-100 board in accordance with
the following figure.

2. Connect the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin D-type male connector to connector
Shelf 1 (see the above figure).

NOTE:
 The cables leading to connectors Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 can only be connected with
a 3-pin D-type connector (regular platforms). If a regular platform has to be connected
to the 5-pin, D-type connector, use a cable with a 5-pin D-type connector on the xRAP-
100 side.
 If a high-power platform has to be connected to the xRAP-100 it can be connected only
to the 5-pin D-type connector (Shelf 4), using a cable with a 5-pin D-type on the xRAP-
100 side.

3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector, as this may
damage the board.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-64


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

If you are connecting additional platforms to the xRAP-100, repeat the above steps for each of them.
Note that a maximum of 65 A is supplied from the power sources to each branch (feeding a pair of
platform). When a high-power platform is connected to the 5-pin D-type connector the adjacent 3-pin
connector (Shelf 3) should not be used.
4. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the platforms to source B.
Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 and attach them to the
retainers with cable ties (see Grounding the xRAP-100).
5. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding platform
position and securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to
each power connector in accordance with its function.

NOTE: Connect the cables to the platforms only after completing the installation of the
platforms and all other components.

3.8.1.7 Install the xRAP-100 circuit breakers


To install the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:
1. If the xRAP-100 front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-
100 front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).

Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is
included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platform); its rating is in accordance with the
ordered platform configuration.
2. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the xRAP-100 source A power
terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
3. If additional platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the other circuit
breakers into the corresponding platform position of the power terminal board.
4. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B circuit breakers.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-65


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.1.8 Check the DC voltage polarity


To check the DC voltage polarity:
1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-100.
2. Set all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to ON.
3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive and negative pins of each
power cable.

CAUTION: When checking the voltage, make sure not to short-circuit the multimeter leads.

NOTE: The power cable terminates with a 3-pin (3W3), 2-pin (2W2), or 5-pin (5W5) connector
in accordance with the connected platform.

4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40.8 VDC to -60 VDC) and that it has the correct
polarity.
5. Return all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to OFF.
6. Switch off the xRAP-100 input power sources.
7. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.

3.8.1.9 Connect alarm cables to the xRAP-100


Use figure xRAP-100 connectors to identify the xRAP-100 connector functions.

To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-100:


1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connectors in the following
steps, as this may damage the module.

2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable to the ALARM IN/OUT
connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties.
3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended for the platform to the
corresponding connector (SHELF 1 to SHELF 4) on the xRAP-100.
Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 (see Grounding the xRAP-
100), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.
4. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding platform position.
Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its function.
5. If additional platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 3 to 5 for the cables serving the
platforms. Make sure to attach identification tags to each cable end.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-66


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.2 Install the RAP-4B


Install the RAP-4B using the following sequence of procedures:
1. Prepare DC input power cables
2. Attach the RAP-4B
3. Ground the RAP-4B
4. Connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B
5. Connect DC power cables to a OPT9608 platform
6. Install the RAP-4B circuit breakers
7. Check DC voltage polarity
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC power cables section.
For a description of the RAP-4B, see OPT96xx Reference Manual.

3.8.2.1 Prepare DC input power cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead
(+48 V) must be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable.
However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead
must be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead with a gray cable. In the following
sections use cables of the colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.

The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the RAP-4B source A and source B
inputs. Two cables are required, one for each source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with
a cross section of 50 mm2 (0.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.

NOTE: When the RAP-4B provides power to a single platform, lower gauge cables may be
used. See DC power cables for DC power cable requirements.

CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location,
make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.

This procedure is the first step in installing the RAP-4B.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-67


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

To prepare a DC input power cable:


1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die.
The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720 crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping
tool with D50 die, or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead jacket) between the cable lug
and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.

3.8.2.2 Attach the RAP-4B


The RAP-4B is attached to the rack side rails at the top of the rack. This procedure is the second step in
installing the RAP-4B.

To install the RAP-4B:


1. Attach the RAP-4B to the side rails.
2. Secure it with 4 screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

3.8.2.3 Ground the RAP-4B


This procedure is the third step in installing the RAP-4B.

To ground the RAP-4B:

NOTE: The RAP-4B is supplied, by default, with a grounding cable connected to the rear of the
unit. Use this cable to connect ground to the RAP-4B.

1. The RAP-4B grounding studs are located on its rear cover as shown in the following figure.

If a grounding cable is already attached to the RAP-4B, skip Steps 2 and 3.


2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead (with a two-hole lug) as details described in Grounding
requirements.
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-4B grounding studs, using spring
washers and nuts.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-68


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

4. Connect the two-hole lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack's grounding bar.

3.8.2.4 Connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B


This procedure is the fourth step in installing the RAP-4B.

To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B:


1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-4B, as shown in the
following figure.

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover and remove it.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-69


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board, as shown in the following
figure (showing source A side; a similar board is used at source B side).

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on
the RAP-4B power terminal board.

4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the appropriate RAP-4B opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on the power terminal board
(see the previous figure).
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 940 N cm
to 1060 N cm.
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board
(see the previous figure).
8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using cable ties.

3.8.2.5 Connect DC power cables to a OPT9608 platform


This procedure is the fifth step in installing the RAP-4B.
During the following procedure, refer to the figure Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B.

To connect the DC power cable to a platform:


1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-4B.
2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the OPT9608 platform through the opening for
power cables connecting to source A. If more platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting
the Platform 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud terminal of Platform 1 on the
power terminal board.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-70


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and M6 screw. Tighten the M6 screw with a torque
of 320 N cm to 350 N cm.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of Platform 1 on the power
terminal board.
6. Repeat Step 4 for the black lead lug.
7. Identify the platforms grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of the RAP-4B according to
the following figure.

8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the ground stud terminal
located on the RAP-4B side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If more OPT9608 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each platform power
cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the platforms to source B.
12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to its corresponding platform, and
then securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each
power connector in accordance with its function.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-71


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.2.6 Install the RAP-4B circuit breakers


This procedure is the sixth step in installing the RAP-4B.

To install the RAP-4B circuit breakers:


1. If the RAP-4B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening it to the
chassis and remove the cover.

2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to power circuit A of Platform 1 (the circuit breaker is
included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment platform; its rating is in accordance
with the ordered platform configuration).

3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the RAP-4B source A power
terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the circuit breakers into
the corresponding platform positions of the power terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source B circuit breakers.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-72


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.2.7 Check DC voltage polarity


This procedure is the seventh and final step in installing the RAP-4B.

To check DC voltage polarity:


Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see Grounding requirements).
6. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-4B.
7. Set all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to ON.
8. Use a DMM to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector contacts assembled on the
cable end connected to the OPT9608 platform, as seen when looking into the connector.

9. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC), and that it has the correct
polarity.
10. Return all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to OFF.
11. Disconnect the RAP-4B input power sources.
12. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it with the two captive screws.

3.8.3 Install the RAP-E


This section describes the procedure for connecting the RAP-E to the OPT9608 power cables.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended to use only the RAP-E for feeding power and connect alarms
to the Apollo 96xx platforms. The RAP-E was designed to address all power and alarm
requirements of this equipment.

Before connecting DC power cables, see DC power cables.


The installation of a RAP-E unit includes the following steps:
1. Preparing DC power cables.
2. Installing the RAP-E (either at the top of the rack or on the extendable installation rails).
3. Grounding the RAP-E.
4. Connecting DC input power cables. In most configurations, four stranded (25 mm2) input power cables
are connected to each side of the RAP-E unit. This is described in Connecting DC input power cables.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-73


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

5. Attach protective covers to the terminals and bottom of the RAP-E unit. (Required for NEBS; optional
for all others.)
6. Connect the DC power cables from the platforms to the RAP-E.
7. Installing the RAP-E circuit breakers.
8. Checking the DC voltage polarity.
9. Connecting alarm cables to the RAP-E.
For a description of the RAP-E, refer to the Apollo 96xx Reference Manual.

3.8.3.1 Install bridges on the RAP-E


The RAP-E can operate with 4 power feeds instead of all 8 available power feeds. To do this, it uses a bridge
that can be attached to the RAP-E power connectors, which are connected to the PCB (printed circuit
board) by 4 screws.
2 bridges can be installed for source A (shown on the figure below) and 2 for source B (not shown). In
addition to the bridges, 1 terminal lug needs to be attached to each bridge. A bridge kit (X56232) is
available for this purpose.
Figure 3-32: RAP-E with 2 bridges

WARNING: To avoid injury to personnel or damage to the equipment, make sure to


disconnect the power supply before performing this procedure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-74


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

To install bridges on the RAP-E:


1. Identify the bridges in the bridge kit.

2. Remove the 4 M6 nuts and M6 locking washers that are mounted on the 4 power terminal screws of
the RAP-E PCB. For the first bridge, use the input terminals marked A1 and A2.
3. Align the 4 holes of the bridge to the 4 screws connected to the PCB.
4. Align the 2 holes of the terminal lug to the 2 screws on the input terminal marked A1.
5. Tighten and secure the bridge and the terminal lug using the four locking washers and nuts removed
in step 2.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to install the second bridge.

NOTE: Installation of a bridge on the source B is identical to the installation of a bridge on


source A of RAP-E.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-75


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.4 Install the PDUxxAL


This section describes the procedures for installing the PDUxxAL and connecting it to power cables and to
the OPT9608.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended to use only the PDUxxAL for feeding power and connect
alarms to OPT9608 platforms. The PDUxxAL was designed to address all power and alarm
requirements of this equipment.

Before connecting DC power cables, see DC power cables.


The installation of a PDUxxAL unit includes the following steps:
1. Preparing DC power cables.
2. Installing the PDUxxAL.
3. Grounding the PDUxxAL.
4. Connecting DC input power cables. In most configurations, five stranded (35 mm2) input power cables
are connected to each side of the PDUxxAL unit.
5. Connect the DC power cables from the platforms to the PDUxxAL.
6. Installing the PDUxxAL circuit breakers.
7. Checking the DC voltage polarity.
8. Connecting alarm cables to the PDUxxAL.
For a description of the PDUxxAL, refer to the Apollo 96xx Reference Manual.

3.8.5 Install the OPP


The OPP can be installed in the same rack as the OPT9608 or in other racks according to the site installation
requirements.

To mount the OPP in the rack:


1. Attach the OPP to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams
or tables of each platform. When preparing the fiber, follow the safety information appearing in Work
and equipment safety.
3. Label the fibers in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack or the
rack sidewalls of the ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the OPP to release the latch, and pull the OPP towards you to
open it.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-76


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

NOTE: The OPP has two opening positions. The tray latches with a click at the halfway
position. Pull it again to open it fully so that you can thread the fibers.

6. Thread the fibers into the OPP, as illustrated in Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP.

NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside the OPP, and fastened with Velcro
strips.

7. Identify the duplex connector position on the duplex connector panel.


8. Connect each equipment fiber to the corresponding network fiber according to the site cabling
diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform.
9. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.
10. Return the OPP to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are closed at all times with the
appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective
cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector and immediately install
a protective cap after a cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 1.4 in. (35 mm). Sharp bending of fibers may
degrade the optical transmission characteristics.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-77


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

Figure 3-33: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-78


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.6 Install the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3


Install the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 using the following sequence of procedures:
1. Attach ETSI brackets to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 (optional)
2. Terminate the AC power cord
3. Ground the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3
4. Prepare for connecting cables to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3
5. Connect cables to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3
6. Attach an AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 in a rack

3.8.6.1 Attach ETSI brackets to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3


The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 is supplied with two kits of brackets, for installation in 19" or ETSI racks. By
default, the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 comes with the 19" brackets attached. You must remove the 19" brackets
and attach the ETSI set only if you are installing the unit in an ETSI rack.

To attach ETSI brackets to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3:


1. Open the tree screws attaching the 19" bracket to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3, on each side of the unit.
2. Remove the 19" brackets.
3. Identify the ETSI bracket kit.
4. Adjust the bracket on the side of the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 at a distance of 18 mm from the first holes
near the front, as shown in the following figure.

5. Attach the bracket to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 side, using three screws from the installation kit.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 above for the second bracket.

IMPORTANT: All connections to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 are made from the rear of the unit.
When installing it in an ETSI rack, there is no convenient access to the rear. Therefore, you
must complete all cable connections to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 before installing it in an ETSI
rack.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-79


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.6.2 Terminating the AC power cord


The AC connector for connecting to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 is a 3-pin, screw terminal block, supplied in the
kit that comes with the unit. You must connect the three wires of the AC power cable to this connector.

To connect the AC terminal connector to the power cord:


1. Identify the 3-pin, screw terminal block in the installation kit.
2. Connect the wires of the AC power cable to the terminal block according to their functions (PE, L, and
N).
You must connect the Mains power plug according to your local Mains network.

To connect the Mains power plug:


 Get a local Mains plug and connect the AC power cord open end wires to the plug.

3.8.6.3 Grounding the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3


The DC+ bar of the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 is directly grounded to the chassis inside the shelf and by the AC
feeding cable to the Mains ground.

3.8.6.4 Preparations for connecting cables to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3


The platform is installed as a unit in the rack. In case the rack is only front-accessible, the cable connections
at the rear of the shelf must be made before the rack installation.

1. Make sure that the AC breaker in the AC distribution panel is switched off.
2. Interconnect the battery blocks/cells so that the total nominal battery string voltage is 48 V.

WARNINGS:
 Make sure that the main battery cables from the power system to the battery strings are
not connected on the battery side yet.
 In case there are additional breakers on the battery side, those breakers must be switched
off for the safe installation procedure.

3. Set all battery and load circuit breakers to OFF.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-80


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.6.5 Connect cables to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3


The rear side of the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 includes battery and load terminals, AC power connector, Alarms
connector, and sensor sockets.

IMPORTANT: All connections to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 are made from the rear of the unit.
When installing it in an ETSI rack, there is no convenient access to the rear. Therefore, you
must complete all cable connections to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 before installing it in an ETSI
rack.

To connect cables to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3:


1. Identify the AC input connector according to the following figure.

2. Connect the AC terminal block connector on the AC power cable, to the AC input connector on the
AC/DC-DPS850-48-3.

NOTE: The recommended mains MCB in the AC distribution panel is 16A C or D type.

3. Identify the battery and load terminals according to the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-81


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

4. Connect the load cables to the load terminals.

WARNING: Pay attention to the + and – polarity, when connecting the load cables.

LOAD 1 to LOAD 6 terminals provide 48 VDC output for connecting up to six loads with up to 2550 W.
The load connections are designed to support different current ratings:
 Load 1 & 2: 12 A maximum per connection
with a recommended cable cross section of 2.5 mm2
 Load 3 & 4: 20 A maximum per connection
with a recommended cable cross section of 4 mm2
 Load 5 & 6: 30 A maximum per connection
with a recommended cable cross section of 4 mm2 to 6 mm2

NOTE: The maximum total power consumed from all load connections is up to 2550 W. If the
system operates in N + 1 load sharing mode, the maximum output power is up to 1700W. This
means that even when the system has three rectifiers installed, the maximum power is
calculated for two, while the third is a standby unit

5. Connect the battery cables to the battery terminals.

WARNING: Pay attention to the + and – polarity, when connecting the battery cables.

BAT1-, BAT1+ - (optional) terminals provide connection to a set of backup batteries. This output
is protected by dedicate 50A MCB.
BAT2-, BAT2+ - (optional) terminals provide connection to a set of backup batteries. This output
is protected by dedicate 50A MCB.

To connect temperature sensor cables:


1. Identify the temperature sensor sockets (RJ-45 sockets) according the figure in the previous
procedure.
2. Connect the connector at the end of the Ambient temperature sensor to the corresponding socket.
3. Connect the connector at the end of the Battery temperature sensor to the corresponding socket.
TA - RJ-45 socket for connecting an optional temperature sensor to sense the Ambient temperature.
TB - RJ-45 socket for connecting an optional temperature sensor to the batteries.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-82


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

To connect the Alarms cable:


The Alarms cable is included in the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 installation kit; it has a D-type, 26-pin, male
connector on one end and open at the other.
1. Identify the ALARM connector according to the figure in the first procedure.
2. Connect the D-type, 26-pin, male connector to the ALARM connector on the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3.
ALARM - D-type connector. provides alarms for AC Mains fault, controller fault, batteries CB trip, and
load CB trip.

3.8.6.6 Install an AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 in a rack

IMPORTANT: All connections to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 are made from the rear of the unit.
When installing it in an ETSI rack, there is no convenient access to the rear. Therefore, you
must complete all cable connections to the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 before installing it in an ETSI
rack.

1. If you are attaching the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 in an ETSI rack, make sure that all cables connected to
the unit are free to move and be routed in the required path.
2. Pay special attention that cables will not be squeezed between the unit and the rack.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-83


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

To install an AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 in a rack:


 Attach the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the side rails and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts
supplied in the installation parts kit.
A typical installation of the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 in an ETSI optical rack is shown in the following figure.

3.8.7 AC/DC power supply connection options


There are several solutions for connecting the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power supply to the OPT9608:
 Direct connection of the DC output from a single AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the OPT9608 PFMs.
 Direct connection of the DC outputs from two separate AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 units to the OPT9608
PFMs. (Each AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 connects to one PFM).
 Connection of the DC voltage from one AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the OPT9608 PFMs via a xRAP-
100/RAP-4B.
 Connection of the DC voltage from two separate AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 units to the OPT9608 PFMs via a
xRAP-100/RAP-4B. (Each AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 connects to the xRAP-100/RAP-4B source input).
These options are described in the following sections. The advantage of using a xRAP-100/RAP-4B is that it
provides a mean for connecting the OPT9608 input /output alarms.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-84


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

The figures show a typical connection for the xRAP-100/RAP-4B, however other RAP types (like RAP-4B and
RAP-BG) are supported in a similar way.
To support redundancy, each solution includes two AC/DC power supplies, the OPT9608 is equipped with
two PFMs, and the xRAP-100/RAP-4B (where applicable) has two separate DC circuits.

3.8.7.1 Direct connection of AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the OPT9608


The following figure shows a schematic diagram of direct connection between a single AC/DC-DPS850-48-3
unit and the OPT9608 PFMs.
Figure 3-34: Direct connection of a AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the Direct connection of a AC/DC-DPS850-48-3
to the OPT9608

The following figure depicts a schematic diagram of direct connection between two AC/DC-DPS850-48-3
units and the OPT9608 PFMs.
Figure 3-35: Direct connection of two AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the OPT9608

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-85


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.7.2 Connect the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the OPT9608 via an xRAP-


100
The following figure shows a schematic diagram of the connection between a single AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to
the OPT9608 via an xRAP-100.
Figure 3-36: Connection of a single AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the OPT9608 via

The following figure shows a schematic diagram of the connection between the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the
OPT9608 via an xRAP-100.
Figure 3-37: Connecting two AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 to the OPT9608 via xRAP-100

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-86


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.8 Install the FST


The FST must be installed 50 mm above the fiber guide. If additional equipment is installed above the FST
(like another OPT9608 platform), an additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such
equipment.

To install the FST in the rack:


1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams
or tables of each platform. When preparing the fibers, refer to the safety information in Installing
OPT9608: before you start safety guidelines.
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull the FST towards you to
open it.

NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches with a click at the halfway position.
Pull it again to open fully so you can thread the fibers.

6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the following figure.

NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside the FST and fastened with Velcro
strips.

7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.


8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-87


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are closed at all times with the
appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective
cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector, and immediately install
a protective cap after a cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm. Sharp bending of fibers may degrade
the optical transmission characteristics.

3.8.9 Install the ODF


The following sections describe the installation of the ODF. The installation of the ODF includes the
following main steps:
 Attaching brackets to the ODF
 Connecting optical fibers
 Installing the ODF in a rack

3.8.9.1 Attach the rack mount brackets to the ODF


Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the following procedures.
The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19 in. and ETSI racks, and the other for
23 in. 7 ft. racks. The 19 in./ETSI rack mount brackets can be used for both ETSI and 19 in. racks.

To attach the rack mount brackets to the ODF:


1. Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mount brackets.
2. Attach each bracket with three screws to the corresponding ODF side panel, as shown in the figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-88


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.9.2 Connect optical fibers to the ODF


To connect optical fibers to the ODF:
1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the latch and pull it towards you.
The cover opens downwards.

2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF components.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-89


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the ODF splice support.
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.

5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail, and slide the splicing sleeve
over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.

NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF, first start filling the slots of the
lower splice support. After the slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and continue
filling the support slots.

9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step 3.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up till it clicks to the unit.
12. Refer to Attaching rack mount brackets and secure the user fibers with cable ties to the fiber-
fastening bracket at the rear of the ODF.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the cable ties.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-90


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.9.3 Install ODF units in a rack


To install ODF units in a rack:
 Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack side rails with four screws.

3.8.10 Install the OPP


The OPP can be installed in the same rack as the OPT9608 or in other racks according to the site installation
requirements.

To mount the OPP in the rack:


1. Attach the OPP to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams
or tables of each platform. When preparing the fiber, follow the safety information appearing in Work
and equipment safety.
3. Label the fibers in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack or the
rack sidewalls of the ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the OPP to release the latch, and pull the OPP towards you to
open it.

NOTE: The OPP has two opening positions. The tray latches with a click at the halfway
position. Pull it again to open it fully so that you can thread the fibers.

6. Thread the fibers into the OPP, as illustrated in Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP.

NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside the OPP, and fastened with Velcro
strips.

7. Identify the duplex connector position on the duplex connector panel.


8. Connect each equipment fiber to the corresponding network fiber according to the site cabling
diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform.
9. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.
10. Return the OPP to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-91


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are closed at all times with the
appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective
cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector and immediately install
a protective cap after a cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 1.4 in. (35 mm). Sharp bending of fibers may
degrade the optical transmission characteristics.

Figure 3-38: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-92


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.11 Install the FMT-1U patch panel


The FMT-1U is a patch panel for fiber fan-out applications. The unit comes, by default, with ETSI brackets
and fiber supports attached, so that if installation in an ETSI rack is required you can go directly to Installing
the FMT-1U in an ETSI rack.
The FMT-1U can accommodate up to four FMT4F fiber optic connection modules. For more details on the
FMT4F refer to the Apollo Reference Manual.
A general view of the FMT-1U is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-39: FMT-1U general view

3.8.11.1 Install the FMT-1U in an ETSI rack


The FMT-1U by default with ETSI brackets and fiber supports attached, so that you have only to install it in
the rack.

To install the FMT-1U unit in an ETSI rack:


 Install the FMT-1U patch panel in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack side rails with
four screws and washers from the installation kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-93


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.11.2 Attach the 19" rack mount brackets to the FMT-1U


The FMT-1U patch panel is supplied with a kit for 19" rack installation. The kit includes 19" brackets,
screws, nuts, and washers.

NOTE: The FMT-1U comes by default with ETSI brackets installed.

1. Identify the prescribed location of the patch panel in the rack before performing the following
procedures.
2. Make sure that all parts of the FMT-1U installation kit are available.

To attach 19" brackets to the FMT-1U:


1. Identify the 19" brackets and accessories according to the following figure.

2. Remove the six screws (three on each side), attaching the ETSI brackets to the unit and remove the
brackets.
3. Attach each 19" bracket, with three screws from the installation kit, to the corresponding patch panel
side, as shown in the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-94


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.8.11.3 Install the FMT-1U in a 19" rack


The FMT-1U patch panel is supplied with two fiber supports that should be attached to the rack with the
same screws used to install the unit.

To install FMT-1U in a rack:


1. Attach the fiber support to each FMT-1U bracket. Use the same holes in the brackets that are used to
attach the unit to the rack.
2. Install each patch panel in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack side rails with four
screws and washers from the installation kit. See the following figure.

3.8.11.4 Install FMT4F modules in the FMT-1U


The FMT-1U can accommodate up to four FMT4F fiber connection modules.

To install a FMT4F module in the FMT-1U:


1. Identify the prescribed location of the FMT4F in the FMT-1U.
2. Insert the FMT4F in the FMT-1U; start from the most left side of the FMT-1U (see the following
figure).

3. Fasten the FMT4F to the FMT-1U with its two captive screws.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-95


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.9 Install accessories in 23" racks


23" racks are open frames that do not have built-in accessories, like fiber channels and cable conduits to
support routing of fibers and cables. Specially designed accessories are attached to the 23" rack to facilitate
cable routing. The principal accessories include:
 PVC conduit for fibers routing, one on each rack side
 Cable holder for routing various cables, up to six attached on each rack side

3.9.1 Attach PVC conduits to the 23" rack


The PVC conduits are attached to both sides of the 23" rack to support routing of fibers between the
OPT9608 cards, modules, and the fiber spoolers. Each conduit is fastened at five points with two brackets
to the frame sides.

To attach a PVC conduit:


For the procedure steps, refer to the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-96


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

1. Identify the prescribed position of the PVC conduit along the frame’s side and the corresponding
attachment point.
2. Insert a WSR F #6 washer on a SRW 12/24 x 5/8 screw.
3. Insert the screw with the nut into a conduit bracket, and then inset the screw into the prescribed hole
in the frame side rail. Fasten the screw to the frame.
4. Take a second conduit bracket and reverse its position, with reference to the first. Align the position
of the brackets so that their slots are parallel.
5. Insert a SRW PH M5 x 16 screw through the brackets (from the side of the first bracket).
6. Place a WSR LS #5 spring washer and a WSR F #5 flat washer on the screw from the side of the second
bracket (keep the washers in the order as indicated).
7. Place a M5 nut on the screw and fasten it a little.
The slots in the brackets enable you to align their position to fit the hole in the conduit.
8. Remove the front cover of the conduit, and align the conduit so that the slot in the second bracket fits
the required hole in the conduit. Align the joint of the brackets to help reach the required position.
9. Fasten the M5 nut on the screw between the two brackets.
10. Insert a SRW PH M5 x 16 screw through the inner side of the conduit and the slot of the second
bracket.
11. Place a WSR LS #5 spring washer and a WSR F #5 flat washer on the screw from the side of the second
bracket (keep the washers in the order as indicated).
12. Place a M5 nut on the screw and fasten it.
13. Repeat steps 2 to 12 for the other attachment points.
14. Place the cover back on the conduit.

3.9.2 Install cable holders


The cable holders are attached to the sides of the rack. Six cable holders can be attached to each side of the
rack (total 12 cable holders).

To install cable holders:


For the procedure steps, refer to the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-97


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

1. Identify the prescribed position of the cable holder on the frame’s side.
2. Insert two SRW FH M6 x 40 screws into the prescribed holes in the inner side of the frame.
3. Take the cable holder and open the captive screw of the movable bar to gain access to the back of the
assembly.
4. Insert the back holes of the cable holder on the screws.
5. Place a WSR LS #6 spring washer on each screw at the inner back side of the cable holder.
6. Assemble two HEX M6 nuts on each screw and fasten them.
7. Place the cable tie comb on the screws.
8. Assemble a HEX M6 nut on each screw and fasten them to the cable tie comb.
9. Replace the movable bar and fasten it with its captive screw.
10. Repeat steps 1 to 9 for each cable holder to be installed.

3.9.3 Install the grounding bar


The grounding bar is attached to the top back rails of the frame. The bar connects the grounding cables of
the site, OPT9608, RAP, and other equipment.

To install the grounding bar:

1. Identify the prescribed location of the grounding bar at the back of the frame.
2. Attach the grounding bar to the frame’s back rails and secure it with four screws supplied in the
installation parts kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-98


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Site preparation and rack installation

3.9.4 Install the fiber spooler


The fiber spooler comes with reversible brackets for 19"/23" with a default position for 19" installation. The
spooler brackets must be removed and reversed to enable installation in a 23" rack.

To install the Fiber Spooler:


1. Remove the screws fastening the brackets to the spooler, keep the screws.
2. Reverse the brackets to 23" position and attach them back to platform, using the screws removed in
the previous step.
3. Identify the prescribed position of the Fiber Spooler in the rack in accordance with the rack
installation plan.
4. Place the Fiber Spooler in the prescribed position.
5. Insert a WSR F #6 washer on a SRW 12/24 x 5/8 screw from the installation kit.
6. Insert the washer and screw set through the corresponding holes in the bracket and the rack rail and
fasten the screw.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the second bracket.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-99


4 Platform installation
OPT9608 platforms can be installed in ETSI optical racks, 19" racks, ANSI 19", and 23" racks.
Different brackets and mechanical adapters are available for attaching the OPT9608 to the supported racks.

NOTE: OPT9608 is suitable for installation in Central Office Facility and other indoor
applications.

If necessary, contact your Customer Support or your local sales representative for help in meeting your
specific installation requirements.
There are several options for installing OPT9608 platforms in their optical ETSI racks. These options are
mainly based on the rack's capacity, which is up to 800 fibers in its two ducts (up to 400 per duct), number
of platforms in the rack, and fiber spooler capacity (up to 400 fibers of length 600 mm). Due to the smaller
size of the OPT9608 platform and its need for only one upper fiber/cable guide to serve its cards and
modules, higher density installations of platforms in a single ETSI optical rack is possible. The installation
options include:
 Basic installation of a single OPT9608 platform
 Installation of 4 OPT9608 platforms, each with an average of 100 fibers per platform
 8 OPT99608 platforms installed vertically
 Grounding the OPT9608 platform
 Other installation options, to meet your special requirements (consulting Customer Support)
These options are described in the following sections.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.1 Typical installation of a single OPT9608


The OPT9608 installation in an optical ETSI rack may include, in addition to the platform itself, accessories
such as RAP, a fiber spooler, an upper fiber/cable guide, and a lower fiber/cable guide according to the rack
installation plan.
Figure 4-1: Typical single OPT9608 platform installation in ETSI optical rack

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

A general view of a single OPT9608 installation is shown in the following figure.


Figure 4-2: Typical installation of one OPT9608 platform, general view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.2 Installation of four OPT9608 platforms


The installation of four OPT9608 platforms with a typical fiber count (88 fibers per platform) may also
include one RAP, one fiber spooler, four upper fiber/cable guides (one per platform). The rack's ducts, with
a capacity of up to 800 fibers, comfortably handle the fibers of four platforms.
The following figure depicts the installation of four OPT9608 platforms.
Figure 4-3: Installation of four OPT9608 platforms in an ETSI optical rack

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

Another general view of the installation is shown in the following figure.


Figure 4-4: Typical installation of four OPT9608 platforms, general view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3 Eight OPT9608/9904X vertical installation in


19" racks
Eight OPT9608/9904X platforms can be installed vertically in 19" racks in a back-to-back configuration. Four
platforms are installed in front of the rack and four at the rear, enabling full utilization of the 19" rack
space. The installation includes ventilation channels for cold and hot air. This special configuration was
designed to comply with NEBS standards for CO (Central Offices) and Telecoms equipment.
The system includes ventilation units that must be installed according to the instructions detailed in the
following sections.
General views of the installation components from the front and rear of the 19" rack is shown in the
following figures.
Figure 4-5: OPT9608/9904X vertical installation - front view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

Figure 4-6: OPT9608/9904X vertical installation - rear view

The installation process is divided into several procedures described in the following sections. In addition a
description of the cooling system is presented as well.

NOTE: It's important to keep the order of ventilation units installation as indicated below.

The vertical installation of eight OPT9608/9904X platforms in 19" rack includes the following steps:
 Attaching 19" installation rulers to the rack
 Installing RAP units
 Installing cold and hot ventilation units at the rear of the rack
 Installing cold and hot ventilation units at front of the rack
 Installing four OPT9608/9904X platforms on the rack front
 Installing four OPT9608/9904X platforms on the rack rear
 Installing covers on cold back ventilation units (applicable if platforms are installed only in front of the
rack)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.1 Ventilation system for eight OPT9608/9904X in 19"


racks
The vertical installation of eight OPT9608/9904X platforms in 19" rack includes a ventilation system
comprised of cold and hot air channels. This special configuration was designed to comply with NEBS
standards for COs (Central Offices) and Telecoms equipment.
NEBS standards for thermal design of telecommunication equipment defines two cooling aisles: a cold air
aisle in front of the racks, and a hot air aisle at the rear. The air supply to the cold aisle in
telecommunication sites comes usually from air conditioning systems with vents that drop cold air from top
down. The cold air is pumped by the equipment fans, flows over the cards and components, and cools
them. The resulting hot air flows out to the hot aisle via hot air channels at the back of the racks.
In general, our platforms include fan units for cooling purposes. They pump the cooling air from right and
pass the hot air to the left, or pump cooling air from the middle and expel hot air up or down. These cooling
methods are not complaint with the required NEBS standards. The special cooling system design solves this
problem , using cold and hot air channels (ventilation units).

NOTE: The installation of the eight OPT9608/9904X is a high specialized task and must be
performed only by authorized personal.

The ventilation system includes generally the following components (see the figure below for reference).
For convenience we will use the shorter terms appearing aside the units full name:
 Structure cold front panel and channels - cold front ventilation unit
 Structure cold back panel and channels - cold back ventilation unit

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

 Structure hot front panel and channels - hot front ventilation unit
 Structure hot back panel and channels - hot back ventilation unit
Figure 4-7: Ventilation system units

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

Cold air flows into the cold front ventilation unit (see the two openings). This unit is partially inserted into
the cold back ventilation unit, forming a telescopic-like channel for cold air flow. In addition, the cold back
ventilation unit has a back cover to prevent escape of the cold air and block hot air from the rack rear to
flow into the cold channel. Notice that these units are open at their top, to enable cold air flow into the
platforms that are installed directly over them. The fan unit of each platform "sits" directly over the top of
the cold ventilation units. The platform's fans pump in cold air that flows over its cards and components
and cools them. The resulting hot air flows out at the other end of the platform.
Figure 4-8: Cold and hot air ventilation units - front

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

This hot air goes into the hot front ventilation unit. This unit is partially inserted into the hot back
ventilation unit, forming a telescopic-like channel for hot air flow. In addition, the hot front ventilation unit
has a back cover to prevent escape of the hot air. Notice that these units are open at their bottom, to
enable hot air flow from the platforms that are installed directly under them. The hot air back units also has
two opening through which hot air is expelled.
Figure 4-9: Cold and hot air ventilation units - front

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

The routes of cold and hot air in the system is schematically shown in the following figure. In this figure cold
air flow is marked blue; hot flow is marked red; air flow through the platforms is marked orange.
Figure 4-10: Cold and hot air routes in the ventilation system

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.2 Attach 19" installation rulers to the rack


Four installation rulers must be attached to the 19" rack for installing eight OPT9608/9904X platforms,
ventilation units, and other accessories. Two rulers are attached to the front and two to the rear of the
rack.
In addition, clip nuts have to be attached to the rulers in specific locations to enable attachment of the
various equipment.

To attach installation rulers in the 19" rack":


1. Place the front rulers in the rack keeping the distance between them according the dimensions in the
following figure.

NOTE: The distance between the rulers must be kept within the limits indicated in the figure.
Failure to do so may cause problems in the ventilation units (channels) installation.

2. Attach the rulers to the rack front sides and fasten them with M6 screws, nuts, and washers from the
installation kit.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the rear rulers.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

To attach installation clip nuts on the rulers:


1. Identify the locations of the clip nuts on the front rulers according to the following figure.

Note: The location of the clip nuts is given in mm from the top of the first square hole at the
rulers bottom. This is reference zero (0) for all clip nuts location.

2. Insert two clip nuts in all indicated locations (one on the left and one on the right rulers).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

3. Identify the locations of the clip nuts on the rear rulers according to the following figure.

Note: The location of the clip nuts is given in mm from the top of the first square hole at the
rulers bottom. This is reference zero (0) for all clip nuts location.

4. Repeat Step 2 for the rear rulers.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-15


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.3 Install RAP units


Two RAP units are installed in the 19" rack to provide power required by the eight OPT9608/9904X
platforms. One RAP is installed at the rack front and one at the rear. Each RAP is responsible for supplying
power to four platforms installed on the corresponding side.

To install a RAP on the rack front and rear:


1. Identify the prescribed location of the RAP in the front of the rack (see the following figure for
reference).

Attach the RAP unit to the front of the rack and fasten it with four M6 screws, nuts, and washers from the
installation kit. For detailed installation select the corresponding installation procedure (see Installing
ancillary units in racks).
2. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for installing the RAP unit at the rear of the rack.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-16


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.4 Install cold and hot ventilation units at the rear of the
rack
Cold and hot ventilation units are installed at the rear of the rack to provide cooling air to the four
OPT9608/9904X platforms installed at the rear, and to remove the hot air, generated by the operating
platforms.

To install cold and hot ventilation units at the rear of the rack:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the cold and hot ventilation units at the rear of the rack according
to the following figure.

2. Attach two cold back ventilation units to the rear of the rack. Fasten each unit with four M6 screws
and washers from the installation kit.
3. Attach two hot back ventilation units to the rear of the rack. Fasten each unit with six M6 screws and
washers from the installation kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-17


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.5 Install cold and hot ventilation units at front of the


rack
Cold and hot ventilation units are installed at front of the rack to provide cooling air to the four
OPT9608/9904X platforms installed at the front, and to remove the hot air, generated by the operating
platforms.

To install cold and hot ventilation units at front of the rack:


1. Identify the prescribed position of the cold and hot ventilation units at front of the rack according to
the following figure.

2. Attach two cold front ventilation units to the front of the rack. Fasten each unit with four M6 screws
and washers from the installation kit.
3. Attach two hot front ventilation units to the front of the rack. Fasten each unit with six M6 screws and
washers from the installation kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-18


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.6 Install four OPT9608/9904X platforms on the rack


front
Up to four OPT9608/9904X can be installed on front of the rack. In this installation the platforms are
positioned vertically, so each platform is attached to the rulers, hot front ventilation unit (at one end), and
to the cold back ventilation unit at the other. In case a platform is not installed you must install special
covers on the ventilation units, to prevent cool/hot air escape in the system.

To install OPT9608/9904X on the rack front:


1. Identify the prescribed position of the OPT9608/9904X at front of the rack according to the following
figure.

2. Attach the OPT9608/9904X to the installation rulers, hot front ventilation unit, and cold front
ventilation unit.
3. Fasten the platform to the rulers with two M6 screws and washers from the installation kit.
4. Fasten the platform to the hot front ventilation unit with two M6 screws and washers from the
installation kit.
5. Fasten the platform to the cold front ventilation unit with two M6 screws and washers from the
installation kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-19


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

6. Repeat Steps 2 to 5 for each OPT9608/9904X installed on the rack front.


A view of four OPT968/9904X vertically installed on front of a 19" rack with ventilation units is shown
in the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-20


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.7 Install four OPT9608/9904X platforms on the rack


rear
Up to four OPT9608/9904X can be installed on rear of the rack. In this installation the platforms are
positioned vertically, so each platform is attached to the rulers, hot back ventilation unit (at one end), and
to the cold back ventilation unit at the other. In case a platform is not installed you must install special
covers on the ventilation units, to prevent cool/hot air escape from the system.

To install OPT9608/9904X on the rack rear:


1. Identify the prescribed position of the OPT9608/9904X at rear of the rack according to the following
figure.

2. Attach the OPT9608/9904X to the installation rulers, hot back ventilation unit, and cold back
ventilation unit.
3. Fasten the platform to the rulers with two M6 screws and washers from the installation kit.
4. Fasten the platform to the hot back ventilation unit with two M6 screws and washers from the
installation kit.
5. Fasten the platform to the cold back ventilation unit with two M6 screws and washers from the
installation kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-21


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

6. Repeat Steps 2 to 5 for each OPT9608/9904X installed on the rack rear.


A view of four OPT968/9904X vertically installed on rear of a 19" rack with ventilation units is shown
in the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-22


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.3.8 Install covers on cold back ventilation units


In case OPT9608/9904X are installed only on front of the 19" rack, the cold back ventilation units must be
covered with special covers to prevent escape of cold air from the system.

To install covers on the cold back ventilation units:


1. Identify the location of the covers for the cold back ventilation units according to the following figure.

2. Place a cover on a cold back ventilation unit.


3. Fasten the cover to the cold back ventilation unit with two M6 screws and washers from the
installation kit.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the other three covers.
The following figure shows the view of the cold back ventilation units with the covers installed.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-23


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.4 Install the OPT9608 platform in a rack


OPT9608 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating floors, or suspended from
overhead mountings. For information, see Installing equipment racks.
By default, OPT9608 platforms are supplied with brackets for horizontal installation in ETSI racks. The
platforms are shipped empty with no cards or modules installed. Therefore, installation activities include:
 Installing OPT9608 in an optical ETSI rack
 Grounding the OPT9608 platform
 Installing OPT9608 cards
 Installing Install single-slot OPT9608 I/O modules and Install double-slot OPT9608 I/O modules
OPT9608 I/O modules

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-24


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.4.1 Platform environmental considerations


Observe the following guidelines when installing the OPT96xx platforms in racks:
 Free airflow through the rack must be guaranteed at all times.
 OPT96xx platforms can be installed in open or closed (with door) racks. When installed in a closed
rack, the door must be perforated.
 Always install the first OPT9608 platform in the lower part of the rack, starting at the 8th hole from the
bottom of the rack's side rails. The space is required for installing a fiber spooler.
 In mixed (horizontal and vertical airflow) equipment installations, always install the equipment with
the horizontal airflow in the lower part of the rack, and the equipment with the vertical airflow above
it.
 Leave a space of at least 1U between the upper accessory of the OPT9608 and the next platform.
 When two OPT9608 platforms are installed in a rack install a heat buffer between the upper and the
lower platform.
 Leave as much space as possible between the rack’s cable supports and the OPT9608 sidewalls.
 Always consider the platform airflow requirements when organizing the cable and fiber routes near
the OPT9608 sidewalls.

4.4.2 Installing OPT9608 in an optical ETSI rack


The OPT9608 platform comes with brackets ready for installation in optical ETSI racks.

To install a OPT9608 platform in an optical ETSI rack:


1. Identify the prescribed position of the OPT9608 platform in the rack in accordance with the rack
installation plan.
2. Place the OPT9608 platform in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to hold it
temporarily in place.
3. Fasten the platform to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-25


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.5 Install the OPT9608 in a 23" rack


The OPT9608 platform comes with brackets ready for installation in optical ETSI racks. To install it in a 23"
rack the ETSI bracket must be removed and brackets for 23" racks attached to the OPT9608. The following
procedures describe the installation of the platform in a 23" rack.

To attach 23" brackets to the OPT9608 platform:


1. Open the four screws fastening the ETSI bracket to the OPT9608 and remove it.
2. Repeat Step 1 for the second bracket.
3. Identify the 23" brackets in the installation kit according to the following figure.

4. Attach the 23" bracket to the right side of the OPT9608 with four M3 screws from the installation kit.
5. Repeat Step 4 for the left side of the OPT9608.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-26


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

To install the OPT9608 in a 23" rack:


1. Identify the prescribed position of the OPT9608 platform in the rack in accordance with the rack
installation plan.
2. Place the OPT9608 platform in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to hold it
temporarily in place.
Figure 4-11: Installing OPT9608 in a 23" rack

3. Insert a WSR F #6 washer on a SRW 12/24 x 5/8 screw from the installation kit.
4. Insert the washer and screw set through the corresponding holes in the bracket and the rack rail and
fasten the screw.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the second hole in the bracket.
6. Repeat Steps 3 to 5 for the second bracket.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-27


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.6 Typical installation of OPT9608 platforms in


23" racks
The installation of OPT9608 platforms in a 23" rack may include three OPT9608 platforms, one RAP, three
fiber spoolers (one per platform), three upper fiber/cable guides (one per platform), and three lower
fiber/cable guides (one per platform).
The following figure depicts this installation option.
Figure 4-12: 9608 installation in 23" rack option

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-28


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

A general view of the installation is shown in the following figure.


Figure 4-13: Typical Installation of 9608 platforms in 23" rack, general view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-29


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

4.7 Grounding the OPT9608 platform

Review the grounding requirements specified in Grounding requirements and Preparing cables and fibers.
Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the grounding connections in accordance with
these requirements.

WARNING:
 The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as the RAP/PDU power cable.
 The thickness of the platform grounding cable must match the thickness of the power
cable from the RAP/PDU to the platform.
 In installation without RAP/PDU units (customer provided power source), the thickness
of the platform grounding cable must match the thickness of the power cable source.

To ground the OPT9608:


1. Verify that the rack and RAP/PDU are grounded correctly, as described in Grounding the rack and To
ground the xRAP-100/RAP-4B.
2. Prepare a grounding cable of at least the same thickness as the RAP/PDU power cable, according to
the instructions in Grounding cables.
The grounding cable nuts, washers, lugs, and bolts are all included with the platform and are attached
to the corresponding grounding points. Remove the parts as needed. Attach the lugs to the cable
ends, in accordance with the instructions in Grounding cables.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-30


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

3. Connect the lug at the end of the grounding cable to one of the pairs of grounding points on the right
side of the rack grounding bar. To secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding bar, hold the two
holes in the cable lug against the two grounding points on the bar and place the flat washers above
the cable lug, followed by the serrated lock washers. Screw in the bolts to hold everything in place.
Tighten the bolts with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.
4. Run the platform grounding cable from the rack grounding bar to the right side of the rack.
5. Thread the grounding cable through an opening into the cable conduit. The cables should now run
down the right side of the rack.
6. Draw the grounding cable out of the cable conduit by gently threading it through one of the openings
level with the grounding studs on the OPT9608 platform.
7. Connect the lug at the free end of the grounding cable to the grounding studs located on the
platform's right installation bracket. Note that the lug at the end of the grounding cable must be
inserted over both grounding studs.

WARNING: To prevent possible damage to OPT96xx equipment, all racks and equipment
must be completely grounded before connecting any external devices powered from an AC
source (110/220 V). All grounding procedures described here must be completed before, for
example, connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE management system.

4.8 Connect grounding cables in 23" racks


The grounding bar installed on 23" racks connects the following grounding cables:
 Site grounding
 Platform grounding
 RAP/PDU grounding
All grounding connections are made using a 35 mm2 (2 AWG) green/yellow cable, terminated with an
appropriate two-hole compression lug.

4.8.1 Connect the site grounding


Immediately after installing the grounding bar, connect the site grounding to the prescribed grounding
points on the grounding bar.

To prepare a grounding cable:


1. Cut the grounding cable to required size.
2. Strip about 22 mm of the green/yellow jacket.
3. Insert the entire lead strands into the two-hole compression lug sleeve.
4. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-31


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Platform installation

To connect the grounding cable:


1. All contact surfaces should be cleaned thoroughly and coated with NO-Oxide compound or
equivalent.
2. Place the cable end with the two-hole compression lug on the corresponding holes on the grounding
bar.
3. Insert an SWR HEX HD M6 x 30 screw through each hole.
4. From the rear side of the grounding bar, assemble a WSR FT #6 flat washer, WSR SP #6 spring washer,
and a HEX M6 nut on each screw (keep the indicated order).
5. Fasten the nuts to the grounding bar.

4.8.2 Connect the OPT9608 grounding


Ground the OPT9608 and the RAP or PDU by following the procedures for each one.

To prepare a grounding cable:


 Use the procedure described in Connecting site grounding to prepare a grounding cable for the
OPT9608 and the RAP or PDU.

To connect the corresponding grounding cables:


 Use the procedure described in Connecting site grounding to connect the grounding cables of the
OPT9608 and the RAP or PDU to the grounding bar.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-32


5 Card and module installation

5.1 Install OPT9608 cards


After the platform has been installed and grounded, you can install the cards.

When you install cards, make sure to align the card with the platform guide rails. Hold the card straight
during insertion and removal, and pull or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located
on adjacent cards/modules.

CAUTION:
 If you feel resistance when inserting cards, immediately retract the card and repeat the
process.
 Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening card screws.

5.1.1 Installing old/new PFM module in OPT9608


OPT9608 platforms can work with two types of DC power modules (PFM) installed in the power module
slots. These modules may be of one of the following types:
 New version of the PFM module, without a circuit breaker on it. We will refer to them as PFM
modules.
 Old version of the PFM module, with the circuit breaker on it. We will refer to them as old PFM
modules.
The functionality of the modules is the same. The modules can be installed side by side in the same
platform.
The procedures in the following sections explain how to install the two versions of modules.

CAUTION: If you are installing the old version of the PFM module, make sure that the circuit
breaker is set to OFF before installing it in the platform.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

To identify the version of the module:


1. Identify the version of the module according to the following figures:

2. To install the module use the procedure in Installing a PFM in the OPT9608

5.1.1.1 Install a PFM in the OPT9608


The OPT9608 platform can work with two DC power modules (PFM) installed in the power module slots (for
power redundancy), or with only one PFM (non-redundant mode). When only one PFM is installed, install a
blank panel on the unused slot. Follow this procedure to install or replace a power module.

NOTE: The old version of the PFM module has a circuit breaker on its front panel and the new
versions doesn't have one. However, the functionality of the module remained the same. The
two versions may be installed side by side.

CAUTION: If you are installing the old version of the PFM module, make sure that the circuit
breaker is set to OFF before installing it in the platform.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

Figure 5-1: Installing PFM08 card in OPT9608

To install a PFM in the OPT9608 platform:


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic
protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage
during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Hold the PFM handle and insert the rear end of the module into the card guides.
4. Push the module in until the panel at the front of the module is flush with the front of the OPT9608
platform. If resistance is felt before the connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening its two captive screws.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5.1.2 Install the PFM08_AC in the OPT9608


The PFM08_AC is an AC to DC power converter. Each card occupies a single PFM slot. To support
redundancy two of these cards must be installed in the OPT9608 and fed from separate AC sources.

WARNING: Before connecting the PFM08_AC to power, make sure that the 230 VAC source is
protected by a 8A circuit breaker, or if you are using 110VAC source, by a 16A circuit breeaker.

The following figure shows a general view of the PFM08_AC.


Figure 5-2: PFM08_AC general view

NOTE: The AC input voltage plug on this card has a special front cover that protects it against
unintended disconnection.

To install an PFM08_AC in the OPT9608 platform:


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic
protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage
during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Hold the PFM08_AC and insert the rear end of the module into the card guides.
4. Push the module in until the sides of the module are touching the front of the OPT9608
platform. If resistance is felt before the sides touch the front panel, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5. Secure the module in place by tightening its captive screws located on each side of the card.
Refer to the above image for illustration.
6. Remove the captive screw holding the plug protection cover in place and pull the cover down.
7. Insert the AC plug in the card.
8. Lift the protection cover and secure it by tightening the captive screw.

CAUTION: To protect the PFM08_AC against lightning (up to 4 Kv) Line to protected Ground,
the following components must be added on the AC power source feeding the card:
 Surge protection Varistors between Line to Neutral
 Surge Arrestors between Line to Ground

5.1.3 Install the FCM in the OPT9608


Each OPT9608 platform must have one fan control module (FCM) installed in the FCU slot. Follow this
procedure to install or replace the module. If the process does not take more than 1.5 minutes, the FCM
can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the platform operation (hot swapping). It is
recommended that you prepare the replacement module in advance and so shorten replacement time to a
minimum.

WARNING: Do not leave the system without an FCM unit for more than 1.5 minutes.

Figure 5-3: Installing the FCM

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

To install/replace an FCM module in the OPT9608 platform:


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment and that the antistatic
protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage
during shipping. Report any problems.
3. In case you are replacing an FCM, extract it from the OPT9608 and remove its filter (if exists). Check
that the filter is clean, otherwise replace it with a new or clean one according to the procedure
Installing an air filter in the FCM. If the replaced FCM doesn't have a "FILTER" label, take it from the kit
and attach it in-front of the FCM.
4. Hold the FCM module handle and insert the rear end of the module into the card guides.
5. Push the module in until the panel at the front of the module is flush with the front of the OPT9608
platform. If resistance is felt before the connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Secure the module in place by tightening its two captive screws.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5.1.4 Install the air filter in the FCM


An air filter must be installed in the FCM before operating the OPT9608 platform. The FCM assembly
includes the housing for the air filter.

NOTE: The insertion of the air filter into the FCM activates a switch that reports its presence
to the management system. If an air filter is not installed, a "filter missing" alarm is generated
and reported.

To install the FCM air filter:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the filter cover to the FCM and remove it, as illustrated in the
following figure.
Figure 5-4: Installing the air filter in the FCM

2. Identify the filter's air intake side, indicated by a coding tab (see the above figure).
3. Insert the clean filter into the FCM housing, with the air intake side facing right, and slide it forwards
until its front edge is flush with the front of the module.
4. Reinstall the filter cover and fasten it to the FCM with its two captive screws.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5.1.5 Install the RCP card


The 9608 can work with two RCP cards installed (for redundancy), in slots RCP-A and RCP-B. Operation with
one RCP is also supported in the 9608 platform (non-redundant mode). When only one RCP is installed in
the 9608, install a blank panel on the unused slot.

CAUTION:
 Before extracting or inserting the RCP into the platform, release the extractor handles by
first pressing the latches at the handle edges outwards, then pulling/pushing both
handles simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card
 When installing optical modules, make sure all SFP/XFP transceiver slots are closed by
protective caps. Do not remove the cover until an SFP/XFP is inserted.
 For your safety and to comply with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements,
protect all unused slots with blank panels to prevent the escape of ventilation from the
fans through these openings.

To install the RCP card:


1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic
protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage during
shipping. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the card’s identification labels.
4. If an NVM (CF - Compact Flash) was not installed in the RCP, do so now before installing the RCP in the
platform. Follow the procedure described in Installing the NVM in the RCP.

NOTE: The following figure shows the installation of the RCP in the 9608.

5. Identify the assigned slot for installing the RCP according to the platform installation plan.
6. Follow the procedure described in Inserting/Extracting a card/module in the OPT9608 Platform to
install the card.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5.1.6 Install the NVM in the RCP


The RCP has a dedicated slot for the NVM (CF - Compact Flash). Place the NVM cover on the NVM after
installation is complete.

To install the NVM in the RCP:


1. Check that the NVM card has not been physically damaged during shipment.
2. Remove the NVM from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage
during shipment. Report any problems.

3. Open the two screws fastening the NVM cover to the RCP, and remove it.
4. Orient the NVM card against the dedicated slot on the RCP, and then insert its rear end (the end with
the connector) in the card guides. Push the card in until it is locked in place.

NOTE: If the NVM lock is not properly fastened, there is no read/write access and the system
emits an NVM “Cardout” alarm.

5. Place the NVM cover on the slot, and fasten it with its two captive screws.

5.1.7 SD (NVM) software upgrade


RCP04X cards accommodate an 8 Gb Secure Digital (SD) plug-in module, (also referred as Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM)) that stores the ShadeTree Operating System (OS) software (future releases may include a
16 Gb SD version). From time to time you may need to upgrade the SD software due to new versions being
issued, to add new features or correct problems. You can obtain upgrades by contacting the Customer
Support. To display information about the version of ShadeTree the switch router is currently running, use
the operation mode show version command.
Before upgrading ShadeTree, it is recommended to perform a backup of current configuration.
To upgrade ShadeTree, you must:
 Get the upgrade bundle from your local Customer Support representative.
 Replace the existing software and reboot the switch router.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

When you replace the existing software and reboot the switch router, some of the component cards may
update their firmware automatically and some need manual update by the request system firmware
update command.

5.1.7.1 About automatic network processor upgrades


The most accurate method for determining whether an upgrade has completed is the use of CLI show
version command.

If you are unsure that an upgrade has completed, you must issue this command before attempting to
remove a card, power down the platform, or restart ShadeTree.

WARNING: It is recommended that you do not remove a card, power down the platform, or
restart ShadeTree while an upgrade is in progress. Instead, wait until the upgrade has
completed.

5.1.7.2 Software upgrade


To upgrade the system software, use the request system software command:
request system software add filename (both | standby)

If you have a dual RCP04X system, you can either upgrade the software on the active RCP04X or the
standby RCP04X, or both RCP04Xs, see Upgrading a dual RCP04X system.

5.1.7.3 Replace existing software with the upgrade

NOTE: If you are upgrading more than one bundle, reboot the platform after you complete
both upgrades, not between upgrades.

To replace existing software:


1. Type request system software add ftp:// username:password@hostname/bundle-name
reboot no-copy, where username:password@hostname/bundle-name is the URL where the file
you want to install resides.
2. Press Enter.
The platform installs the new software and then reboots using the new software.
3. Wait for the installation process to complete. The RCP04X and all other cards should reboot.
4. To see whether all the cards are up, type the command: show chassis status.
5. Type the command: request system firmware-update.
The software upgrade process is complete.
The system installs the selected software bundle.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

If you are downgrading, the system looks for an old configuration to use with the older version of software.
If it finds one, it asks you if you want to use the configuration.
If there is a problem loading the configuration file or if the configuration file is not supported by the
software version (in the case of downgrades), the CLI prompts you for the location of a usable configuration
file. You also have the option of loading the current configuration, despite errors. The CLI lists the errors it
encounters when parsing the configuration.
Most software upgrades require you to reboot the platform in order for the upgrade to take effect. The CLI
informs you when you have to reboot or restart after a request system software add. In both cases
it is recommended to reboot.

NOTE: To upgrade the standby RCP04X, use the command request system software
add filename standby reboot no-copy.

Example
The following example adds the software bundle all-latest.tar:
user@host> request system software add all-latest.tar

Extracting...
Staging...
Preparing... ########################################### [100%]
1:libpthread ########################################### [ 12%]
2:libstdc++ ########################################### [ 25%]
3:omniorb ########################################### [ 37%]
4:st ########################################### [ 50%]
5:st-domestic########################################### [ 62%]
6:st-pkg ########################################### [ 75%]
7:st-ssh ########################################### [ 87%]
Staged successfully.
WARNING: restart required for staged software to be installed and take
effect
Software add succeeded

5.1.7.4 Upgrade a dual RCP system


The following procedure describes the upgrade of a dual RCP platform. In general the upgrade of such
platform can be performed using the command: request system software add ftp://
username:password@hostname/bundle-name no-copy both reboot. However, the use of the
following procedure is recommended, because the use of the "both" option in the above command
interrupts traffic for a few minutes. When using the procedure, traffic interruption is minimal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

NOTE: You should disable automatic configuration file synchronization when you upgrade
software on a dual RCP system to prevent overwriting the older configuration before you have
tested the new upgrade.

To upgrade software on a dual RCP04X system:


1. Upgrade the standby RCP.
2. Reboot or restart the standby RCP, if necessary.
3. Manually switch over to the standby RCP.
4. The standby RCP becomes the active RCP.
5. Verify that the new software is configured to your satisfaction, if desired.
6. Upgrade the standby RCP (formerly the active RCP).
7. Reboot or restart the standby RCP, if necessary.
If you wish to switch back to the other RCP, you can manually switch RCPs again.

NOTE: Alternatively, you can upgrade both the active and the standby RCP at the same time
by using the request system software add filename no-copy both reboot
command.

5.2 Insert/extract OPT96xx cards with regular or


modified extractors
RCP, FM, and I/O cards of OPT96xx platforms have special extractor handles. These extractors may be of
one of the following types:
 Extractors introduced starting Apollo 96xx V3.8. We will refer to them as regular extractors.
 Modified extractors introduced starting Apollo 96xx V8.2. We will refer to them as modified
extractors.
The procedures in the following sections explain how to insert/extract cards with regular or modified
extractors. The insertion/extraction of a card in a platform must be performed according to these
procedures and to the corresponding type of extractor handles. Failure to do so may damage the card.
Therefore, it's very important to first identify the extractor type and select the correct procedure to handle
it.

CAUTION: Before inserting or extracting a card into the platform, identify its extractor type
and act according to the corresponding procedure.

NOTE: Identical OPT96xx cards with regular or modified extractors can operate in the same
platform without any limitation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

To identify the card's extractor type:


1. Identify the extractor type according to the following figures:
Figure 5-5: OPT96xx card with regular extractors

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

Figure 5-6: OPT96xx card with modified extractors

2. To insert/extract cards with regular extractors use the procedure in Inserting/extracting a card with
regular extractors.
3. To insert/extract cards with modified extractors use the procedure in Inserting/extracting a card with
modified extractors.

5.2.1 Insert/extract OPT9608 cards with regular extractors


The following procedures explain how to insert/extract a card with regular extractors. The
insertion/extraction of a card in the platform must be performed according to these procedures. Failure to
do so may damage the card.

CAUTION: Before inserting or extracting a card into the platform, release the extractors by
pressing the latches inwards and pulling/pushing both handles simultaneously. Failure to do
so may damage the card.

NOTE: In their regular position the handles are near vertical with reference to the front panel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

To insert a card with regular extractors into the OPT9608 platform:


1. Release the extractor mechanism:
a. Hold the extractor with your thumb and press the latch (red button) inwards with your index
finger. Do this on both extractors (right and left).
)

b. Without releasing your hold, pull the handles outwards until they stop (see the following figure).

c. The handles are now in a new position, ready for card insertion (see the following figure).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-15


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

2. Insert the rear end of the card into the card guides.
3. Make sure that the two fastening (captive) screws are free to move backwards as the card slides in.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-16


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

4. Push the card front panel in until the extractor handles stop moving.
5. Simultaneously, push both handles inwards until they stop (see arrows near handles in the figure
below). Verify that the front of the card is flush with the front of the OPT9608 platform and the
extractors stop.

6. If you feel resistance while inserting the card, retract it and repeat the procedure.
7. Fasten the card with its two captive screws. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.

To extract a card with regular extractors from the OPT9608 platform:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the card to the platform.
2. Release the extractor mechanism:
a. Hold the extractor with your thumb and press the latch (red button) inwards with your index
finger. Do this on both extractors (right and left).
Without releasing your hold, pull the handles outwards (see the arrows near the handles in figure Card
handles in regular position) and extract the card. Make sure that both latches are released.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-17


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5.2.2 Insert/extract a card with modified extractors


The following procedures explain how to insert/extract a card with modified extractors. The
insertion/extraction of a card in the platform must be performed according to these procedures. Failure to
do so may damage the card.

CAUTION: Before inserting or extracting a card into the platform, release the extractors by
pressing the latches inwards and pulling/pushing both handles simultaneously. Failure to do
so may damage the card.

NOTE: In their regular position the handles are near vertical with reference to the front panel.

To insert a card with modified extractors into the OPT9608 platform:


1. Release the extractor mechanism:
a. Hold the extractor with your thumb and press the latch upwards with your index finger. Do this
on both extractors (right and left).
)

b. Pull the handles outwards until they stop (see the following figure).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-18


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

c. The handles are now in a new position, ready for card insertion (see the following figure).

2. Insert the rear end of the card into the card guides.
3. Make sure that the two fastening (captive) screws are free to move backwards as the card slides in.
4. Push the card front panel in until the extractor handles stop moving.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-19


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5. Simultaneously, push both handles inwards until they stop (see arrows near handles in the figure
below). Verify that the front of the card is flush with the front of the OPT9608 platform and the
extractors stop.

6. If you feel resistance while inserting the card, retract it and repeat the procedure.
7. Fasten the card with its two captive screws. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.

To extract a card with modified extractors from the OPT9608 platform:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the card to the platform.
2. Release the extractor mechanism:
a. Hold the extractor with your thumb and press the latch (red button) upwards with your index
finger. Do this on both extractors (right and left).
b. Extractors jump out until they stop; pull the handles outwards (see the arrows near the handles
in figure Card handles in regular position (Modified)) and extract the card. Make sure that both
latches are released.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-20


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5.3 Install single-slot OPT9608 I/O modules


This section describes the installation procedure for OPT9608 single-slot and double-slot (long) I/O
modules. The same process can also be used to replace modules in an operating platform, provided the
general safety precautions listed in Installing OPT9608: Before you start safety guidelines and the module-
specific warnings listed in the OPT96xx Reference Manual are strictly followed. Before starting, make sure
that all I/O modules specified for installation in the OPT9608 platform, in accordance with the platform
installation plan, are available.
All I/O modules are installed in Slot 0 to Slot 7 of the OPT9608 platform.
They include the following:
 Service Cards (TRs)
 Optical Amplifiers (OAs)
 ROADMs
 Passive Cards (MUXs, OADMs, DCFs etc.)
For a list and technical description of all available modules, see the OPT96xx Reference Manual, General
Description, and Technical Specifications.

CAUTION:
 When installing optical modules, make sure all SFP/XFP transceiver slots are closed by
protective caps. Do not remove the cover until an SFP/XFP is inserted.
 For your safety and to comply with EMC requirements and to prevent ventilation from
the fans escaping through these openings, protect all unused slots with blank panels.

To install a single-slot I/O module in the OPT9608:


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic
protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage
during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the module’s identification labels.
4. Identify the assigned slot for installing the I/O module in accordance with the platform installation
plan.

CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully align it with the cage guide rails. If
you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the process.
Hold the module straight during insertion and extraction. Pull or push it slowly and carefully to
avoid touching components on adjacent modules.

5. If you are installing double-slot I/O module, proceed to Installing double-slot OPT9608 I/O modules.
6. Follow the procedure described in Inserting/extracting a card with new extractors in the OPT9608
platform to install the module.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-21


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

7. If you are installing modules with SFP/XFP transceivers, proceed to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in
cards and I/O modules.
8. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram.
Install blank panels over all free slots.

5.4 Install double-slot OPT9608 I/O modules


To install double-slot (long) modules in OPT96xx platforms you must first remove a module guide between
the slots to form a double long slot. The following procedures describe the preparation of a double long slot
and the installation of the corresponding module.

NOTE: The figures in the following procedures show the I/O slot structure in an OPT9608 and
the procedure steps correspond to this platform. However, the basic structure of the slots in
the other OPT96xx platforms (OPT9624 and OPT9603) is similar. Interpret the slot position in
the corresponding platform you are handling to correctly perform the procedures.

The general view of an OPT9608 slot structure is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-7: OPT96xx and OPT9608 I/O slot structure

In this structure each pair of slots is separated by a module guide that can be removed to form a double
(long) slot. There is a small difference between the guide in the upper and lower pair of slots.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-22


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

To prepare a double-slot (long) in a lower slot pair:


1. Identify the two slots in which the I/O module has to be installed.
2. Identify the corresponding lower module guide between the slots according to the following figure.

3. Remove the two M2 screws fastening the guide to the platform.


4. Slide out the guide and remove it.

To prepare a double-slot (long) in an upper slot pair:


1. Identify the two slots in which the I/O module has to be installed.
2. Identify the corresponding upper module guide and screw-holder between the slots according to the
following figure.

3. Open the screw fastening the holder to the platform and remove it.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-23


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

4. Remove the two M2 screws fastening the module guide to the platform.
5. Slide out the guide and remove it.

To install a double-slot (long) I/O module in the OPT9608:


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic
protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage
during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the module’s identification labels.
4. Identify the assigned double-slot for installing the I/O module in accordance with the platform
installation plan.

CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully align it with the cage guide rails. If
you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the process.
Hold the module straight during insertion and extraction. Pull or push it slowly and carefully to
avoid touching components on adjacent modules.

5. Follow the procedure described in Inserting/extracting a card with new extractors in the OPT9608
platform to install the module.
6. If you are installing modules with SFP/XFP transceivers, proceed to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in
cards and I/O modules.
7. After inserting all modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install
blank panels over all free slots.

5.5 Install SFP/XFP transceivers in cards and I/O


modules
CAUTION: During the installation of SFP/XFP transceivers in cards and I/O modules, make sure
that all optical LC connectors are covered by protective caps. Do not remove the caps until an
optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector.

To install SFP/XFP transceivers in cards and I/O modules:


1. Identify the prescribed position on the card/module according to the site installation plan.
2. Check that the SFP/XFP has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic
protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
3. Remove the SFP/XFP from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage
during shipping. Report any problems.
4. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the SFP/XFP identification labels.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-24


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Card and module installation

5. Remove the protective covers from the slot and from the SFP/XFP transceiver.
6. Insert the rear end of the transceiver into the slot guides, and push slowly backwards to mate the
connectors until the transceiver clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully
mated, retract the transceiver and repeat the procedure.

CAUTION: All slots that are not in use must remain covered. If you have to replace a module
or card, remove the SFP/XFP first.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-25


6 Installation and connection of fibers and
cables

6.1 Cable routing options in the optical ETSI rack


The optical ETSI rack was designed with a very high level of flexibility, allowing for changes in the default
fiber/cable routing and functionality. By default the rack has two wide cable conduits (one on each side)
with a fiber channel running in front of it. The rack's cable and fiber routing capacity can best be utilized by
installing separator brackets in the cable conduits. This divides the routing space into three areas that can
accommodate mixtures of fibers and cables according to the specific installation requirements. The
following figure shows a an optical ETSI rack with separator brackets installed.
Figure 6-1: Optical ETSI rack with separator brackets

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

The figure also shows the three areas allocated for routing cables/fibers.
Note that the rack features six fastening comb strips (three on each side) that can be used for attaching
cables/fibers with appropriate cable ties. These strips have five holes to which separator brackets can be
attached. The flexibility this provides means that the spaces in the cable conduit can vary, as required. The
separator brackets are perforated; cables/fibers can be attached to the holes.
The following figure shows a cross-section view of the rack's side, including the cable conduit and fiber
channel. It also depicts the three areas for routing fibers and cables and the options recommended for
routing cables/fibers in the optical ETSI rack according to the specific installation requirements.
The following figure shows a cross-section view of the rack's side, including the cable conduit, fiber channel,
and the three areas. It illustrates the options recommended for routing cables/fibers according to the
specific installation requirements.
Figure 6-2: Cable routing options (each rack side)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

 Option A shows the routing of max. 900 fibers (Ø 2 mm) and max. 24 copper cables (Ø = 12 mm).
The space is used for:
 Max. 400 fibers @ 2 mm in Area 1
 Max. 500 fibers @ 2 mm in Area 2
 Max. 24 cables @ 12 mm in Area 3
 Option B shows the routing of max. 400 fibers (Ø 2 mm) and max. 48 copper cables (Ø = 12 mm).
The space is used for:
 Max. 400 fibers @ 2 mm in Area 1
 Max. 24 cables @ 12 mm in Area 2 and 3
 Option C shows the routing of max. 1500 fibers (Ø 2 mm); no cables are used in this option. The
space is used for:
 Max. 400 fibers @ 2 mm in Area 1
 Max. 1100 fibers @ 2 mm in Area 2 and 3

6.2 Fiber/cable guide


Fiber/Cable guides are dual-purpose units that can be used for fiber and cable routing. They help to neatly
route fibers connected to the front panels of modules installed in racks into ducts on the rack sides. The
guide also helps keep the recommended bending radius of the routed fibers to prevent fiber break or signal
degradation within the fiber.
The fiber/cable guide has a significant advantage over a guide dedicated only to fibers or only to cables, as
you have the choice to route fibers and cables separately or together for equipment with mixed optical and
electrical interfaces.
Routing the fibers through fiber guides cancels the load on the optical connectors resulting from the fibers’
weight. It also enables optimal distribution of fiber bundles according to the location of the cards they
serve, and comfortable card removal for maintenance or repair purposes.
The use of fiber/cable guides gives an organized look and feel to the system, especially in installations with
multiple fibers/cables.
We offer two types of fiber/cable guides:
 Upper fiber/cable guide - for routing fibers/cables connected to interfaces in the upper part of the
equipment
 Lower fiber/cable guide - for routing fibers/cables connected to interfaces in the lower part of the
equipment
These fiber/cable guides are available for both ETSI and 19" equipment racks and can also be adapted for
use in other racks. The 19" guides can be installed in ANSI 19" racks using a spacer adapter kit. The ETSI
guides can be installed in ANSI 23" racks using a bracket kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

6.2.1 Upper fiber/cable guide


The upper fiber/cable guide is always installed above the platform and serves cards/modules installed in
the upper part of the platform.
Figure 6-3: Upper fiber/cable guide

The guide has two types of radius-limiting elements:


 Fixed radius limiter
 Adjustable radius limiter
For efficient fiber (or cable) routing, the radius limiters are located on both sides of the guide so that they
can handle fibers/cables entering the guide from either side. In addition, the guide has openings that
facilitate the path of fibers and cables to the required route towards the rack's cable conduits or fiber
channels.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

6.2.2 Lower fiber/cable guide


The lower fiber/cable guide is always installed below the platform, and serves cards/modules installed in
the lower part of the platform. In general the lower and Upper fiber/cable guide are similar.
Figure 6-4: Lower fiber/cable guide

The lower fiber/cable guide has two types of radius-limiting elements:


 Fixed radius limiter
 Adjustable radius limiter
For efficient fiber (or cable) routing, the radius limiters are located on both sides of the guide so that they
can handle fibers/cables entering the guide from either side. In addition, the guide has openings that
facilitate the path of fibers and cables to the required route towards the rack's cable conduits or fiber
channels. The main difference between the upper and lower fiber/cable guides is that the latter also has a
cable support that helps neatly route fibers/cables and supports their weight.
The smart design of the upper and lower fiber/cable guides enables the technical staff to maintain and
repair the required hardware (card/module) without affecting traffic on adjacent cards/modules. This is
due to the fixed and adjustable radius limiters.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

6.3 Guidelines for routing fibers and cables in


OPT96xx platforms
This section provides guidelines for routing optical fibers in OPT96xx platforms installed in ETSI optical
racks. When we discuss routing of fibers in OPT9608 platforms, we are assuming a basic installation
configuration that includes an Upper fiber/cable Guide installed above the platform, a Lower fiber/cable
guide installed below the platform, and a fiber spooler installed above the upper fiber/cable guide.
The following figure shows the OPT9608 platform slot layout.
Figure 6-5: OPT9608 slot layout

The OPT9608 has eight I/O slots. We will designate the modules installed in the two top slots and in the two
bottom slots as "outer modules", and the modules installed in the two slots below the top slots and the
two slots above the bottom slots as "inner modules".
In order to benefit from the fiber/cable guides when routing fibers from I/O modules on the OPT9608, you
must follow these guidelines:
 Always route the fibers from the outer module as follows:
 Fibers from the top outer modules must be routed to the fixed radius limiters on the upper
fiber/cable guide.
 Fibers from the bottom outer modules must be routed to the fixed radius limiters on the lower
fiber/cable guide.
 Always route the fibers from the inner modules as follows:
 Fibers from the upper inner modules must be routed to the adjustable radius limiters on the
upper fiber/cable guide.
 Fibers from the lower inner modules must be routed to the adjustable radius limiters on the
lower fiber/cable guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

6.3.1 Connect power cables


The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the PFM cards.

To connect power cables:

NOTE: To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended to start from the OPT9608
platform towards the xRAP-100/RAP-4B.

1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the power connector of the PFM in slot PFM-
A, and fasten it with its two captive screws.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the cable connector, as this may
damage the module.

2. Repeat Step 1 for the second power cable to be connected to the corresponding PFM in slot PFM-B.
3. Bend the cables and thread them through the opening in the upper fiber/cable guide.
4. Pull the cable upward through the cable conduit at the side of the rack. Attach the cables to the comb
strip (at the inner side of the rack) with cable ties as required.
5. Pull the cables until the cable lugs are positioned against the appropriate connection points on the
xRAP-100/RAP-4B.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.

NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation is described in Installing the xRAP-100 , and the RAP-4B in
Installing the RAP-4B.

7. Connect the free ends of the power cables to the DC power connections on the xRAP-100/RAP-4B in
accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags.

CAUTION: Do not extract/insert a PFM card while the DC cables are connected to it.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

6.3.2 Connect alarm cables


Alarm cables are connected on one end to the corresponding connector on the FCM front panel and on the
other in accordance with the alarm cable type. Alarm cables intended for use with RAP units are connected
to the corresponding connector on the RAP. Alarm cables that are open on the other end are connected to
the customer's alarms collecting facility.

To connect alarm cables:


1. Connect the 36-pin SCSI female connector at the end of the alarm cable to the ALARMS connector on
the FCM card, and fasten it with its two captive screws.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the cable connector, as this may
damage the card.

2. Bend the cable and thread it through the opening in the upper fiber/cable guide.
3. Pull the cable upward through the cable conduit at the side of the rack. Attach the cable to the comb
strip (in the inner side of the rack) with cable ties as required.
Proceed according to the cable type:
 For cables to be connected to the xRAP-100/RAP-4B, continue to Step 4.
 For cables to be connected to the customer alarms collecting facility, go directly to Step 6.
4. Pull the cable to the level of the SHELF alarm connectors on the xRAP-100/RAP-4B.

NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation is described in Installing the xRAP-100 , and the RAP-4B in
Installing the RAP-4B.

5. Connect the 36-pin male connector at the end of the cable to the corresponding SHELF connector,
and fasten it with its two captive screws. This completes the installation of the alarm cables for RAP-
4B.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the cable connector, as this may
damage the RAP-4B.

6. Route the alarm cable with the open ends through the cable conduit to one of the rack top openings
towards the outside.
7. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.
8. Connect the free ends of the cables according to the rack installation plan and the cable tags.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

6.3.3 Connect electrical ethernet cables to I/O modules


I/O modules with electrical Ethernet interfaces are connected with CAT5E SFTP 2-pair straight cables or 4-
pair or CAT5E SFTP 4-pair straight cables with RJ45 connectors, according to the interface.

Before connecting electrical Ethernet cables to I/O modules, review the section Cable routing options in the
optical ETSI rack and the Guidelines for routing fibers and cables in OPT96xx platforms.

To connect Ethernet cables to an I/O module:

NOTE: To support the auto-negotiation feature on electrical ports, use CAT5E SFTP 2-pair or
4-pair straight cable to connect 10/100BaseT ports, or CAT5E SFTP 4-pair straight cable to
connect 1000BaseT ports.

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the data cables in groups according to the designated I/O
module, and route them inside the cable conduits at the side of the rack to the appropriate OPT9608
unit.
2. Depending on the location of the I/O module (upper or lower part of the platform), pass the cables
through the opening in the corresponding fiber/cable guide.
3. If the cables are routed to an outer module , roll them around the fixed radius limiters on the
corresponding fiber/cable guide.
4. If the cables are routed to an inner module , open the captive screws fastening the adjustable radius
limiters in place on the corresponding fiber/cable guide.
5. Roll the cables around the adjustable radius limiters on the corresponding fiber/cable guide.
The following figure shows an example of Ethernet cables routing to I/O modules.

6. Pull each data cable up or down to the level of the corresponding data module.
7. Bend the cable, so that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate module.
8. Connect the RJ-45 connector at the end of each cable to the corresponding interface on the I/O
module, in accordance with the rack installation plan.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

9. Make sure that the cables connected to inner modules are correctly rolled around the adjustable
radius limiters. Fix them in this position by fastening their captive screws.
10. Organize the cables connected to the module in bundles and fasten each bundle with Velcro strips.

6.3.4 Connect optical fibers to I/O modules


All optical fibers in the OPT9608 platform are connected to the LC connectors on the SFP/XFP transceivers
located on the various modules.

Before installing the OPT9608 platform and modules, all optical fibers must be routed through the fiber
channels running along the front supports of the optical ETSI rack. From the fiber channels, the fibers must
be routed near the OPT9608 platform you are installing. Before connecting optical fibers to I/O modules,
review the section Cable routing options in the optical ETSI Rack and guidelines for routing fibers and cables
in OPT96xx platforms.

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are closed at all times with the
appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective
cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector, and immediately install
a protective cap after a cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm. Sharp bending of fibers may degrade
optical transmission characteristics.

To connect optical fibers to an I/O module:


1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the fibers in groups according to the designated I/O
module, and route them inside the fiber channels at the side of the rack to the appropriate OPT9608
unit.
2. Depending on the location of the fiber/cable guide serving the corresponding I/O module (upper or
lower part of the platform), thread the fibers through an opening in the fiber channel.
3. If the fibers are routed to an outer module , roll them around the fixed radius limiters on the
corresponding fiber/cable guide.
The following figure shows an example of routing fibers to I/O modules.

4. If the fibers are routed to an inner module , open the captive screws fastening the adjustable radius
limiters in place on the corresponding fiber/cable guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation and connection of fibers and cables

5. Roll the fibers around the adjustable radius limiters on the corresponding fiber/cable guide.
6. Pull each fiber up or down to the level of the corresponding I/O module.
7. Bend the fiber so that the optical connector is positioned at the level of SFP/XFP transceiver LC
connector on the designated I/O module. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
8. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved cleaning kit.
9. Remove the cover from the SFP/XFP transceiver and connect the fiber LC connector to the SFP/XFP
connector, in accordance with the rack installation plan.
10. Make sure that the fibers connected to inner modules are correctly rolled around the adjustable
radius limiters. Fix them in this position by fastening their captive screws.
11. Organize the fibers connected to the module in bundles, and fasten each bundle with Velcro strips.
12. Roll fiber spares at the other end around the spools in the fiber spooler, and route the other end of
the fibers through the fiber channels and the openings in the rack to the outside, as required.

6.3.5 Connect management cables


The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connector designated EXP2 on the RCP card. Each
cable is terminated with an RJ-45 plug.
The cable from the management station must be plugged into the EXP2 connector on the RCP card.

To connect management cables to the OPT9608 platform:


1. Route the management cables through the cable conduit at the side of the rack to the appropriate
OPT9608 platform.
2. Bend the management cables and pull them out through an opening in the cable conduits to the level
of the corresponding fiber/cable guide serving the OPT9608 platform.
3. Thread the management cables through an opening in the fiber/cable guide.
4. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding RCP and bend it until the RJ-45 plug is
positioned against the appropriate EXP2 management connector on the RCP.
5. Connect the management station cable to the EXP2 connector of the platform in accordance with the
rack installation plan and the cable tags.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the platforms.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-11


7 OPT9608 platform initial setup
This section describes how to perform the initial setup of the OPT9608 platform.

7.1 Required accessories


Following is a list of accessories required to perform the initial setup of the OPT9608 platform:
 Laptop/PC with serial/USB port
 USB to RS-232 (DB9) cable converter
 RS-232 (DB-9) to RJ-45 serial cable
 CODM Debug accessory + cables
 Mini-USB to RS-232(DB-9) gray cable
 HDMI to Mini HDMI black cable
Figure 7-1: CODM Debugger

 CF memory card reader for Laptop/PC


 Empty 8G CF memory cards
 NVM loader tool (if required)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual OPT9608 platform initial setup

7.2 Setting up the system


1. Burn the NVM CF card with the up to date embedded version using the NVM loader tool.
2. Remove the RCP module.
3. Remove the cover of the CF slot located on the front panel of the RCP1_4AD_T module by releasing
the two screws (see Figure)

4. Insert gently the CF (NVM) into the CF housing located on the front panel of the RCP module.

5. Insert the RCP Module in the correct slot on the OPT9608 chassis. The RCP slots are marked RCP_A
and RCP_B.

NOTE: If the system is configured with two RCP modules, then apply this procedure to both
modules.

6. Check that the FCM (Fan Control Module) tray, located on the right-hand side of the shelf is fully
inserted.
7. Ensure that the two captive screws (see Figure) located at the top and bottom of the FCM are
tightened.

8. Connect power cable from PFM unit to RAP.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual OPT9608 platform initial setup

9. Power up the shelf.


10. Using the Serial cable, connect the RJ-45 end to the CONSOLE port on the RCP module and the other
end connect to your PC/Laptop.

11. Set up a SLIP (serial) connection. The settings in the COM Properties window are shown below.

12. Login as admin:


 User name: admin
 Password: admin1
The following prompt appears: [adminroot@localhost~]$#
Then the following prompt appears: admin@localhost>
This indicates that you are now in operational mode.
13. To shift to configure/edit mode, type: configure:
admin@localhost>configure
Entering configuration mode
Users currently editing the configuration:
[edit]

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual OPT9608 platform initial setup

The following prompt appears: admin@localhost#

7.2.1 Host Name (NE NAME) setup


To setup the Host Name:
1. Setup the host name (NE Name) of the Apollo platform.
admin@localhost# set system host-name OPT9608
2. For any mistake made after inserting this command you can delete it by using rollback; if it is ok
continue to commit it.
admin@OPT9608# rollback
load complete
3. Type in admin@localhost# commit.
Commit succeeded
4. You will be able to see that the host name of the Apollo platform changed.
[edit]
admin@OPT9608#

7.2.2 Time and time zone setup


To setup the time and time zone:
1. Setup the time.
admin@OPT9608# run set date <MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]>
2. Setup the time zone.
admin@OPT9608# set system time-zone <Zone>
3. For any mistake made after inserting this command you can delete it by using rollback. If it is ok
continue to commit it.
admin@OPT9608# rollback
load complete
4. Type in admin@localhost# commit.
commit succeeded.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual OPT9608 platform initial setup

7.2.3 IP address, subnet mask, and NE gateway setup


To setup the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway of the NE:
1. Set management mode and DCN address.
admin@localhost# set system management-mode dcn <DCN address, for example: 1.0.0.114 >
2. For any mistake made after inserting this command you can delete it by using rollback. If it is ok
continue to commit it.
admin@OPT9608# rollback
load complete
3. Type in admin@OPT9608# commit.
Commit succeeded.
4. Enable IMG port.
admin@OPT9608# set chassis rcp port 0 enable
5. Type in admin@OPT9608# commit.
Commit succeeded.
6. Setup the IP address and the subnet mask of the management port.
admin@OPT9608# set interfaces fe-rcp unit 0 family inet address
<IP/Mask, for example: 172.30.88.114/22>
7. Type in admin@OPT9608# commit.
Commit succeeded.
8. Setup the gateway of the management port (adding static route).
admin@OPT9608# set routing-instances DCN-routing-instance routing-options
rib inet.0 static route 0.0.0.0/0 next-hop <Router IP, for example: 172.30.91.254>

7.2.4 NE discovery by the STMS setup


To setup the NE discovery by the STMS:
1. In the NE there is a need to enable the auto discovery from STMS.
Type in under config mode admin@OPT9608# set system services stms discovery enable
2. Type in admin@OPT9608# commit.
Commit succeeded
3. Open the STMS window and do Auto discovery, enter the IP address of the NE and the discovery
process will start. After a few seconds the NE should be fully discovered & managed in the STMS.
4. Another way to do it is to add the STMS server ip to the NE in addition to enabling the discovery.
Type in admin@OPT9608# set system services stms server A.B.C.D
A.B.C.D = STMS server IP address
5. Type in admin@OPT9608# commit.
Commit succeeded
6. The Auto discovery will start on STMS without doing it from the server.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-5


8 Commissioning tests
Commissioning tests are performed after completing the installation and preliminary configuration of a
new network. These procedures confirm that the network has been installed properly and is operating in
accordance with the design specifications.
This chapter provides general commissioning procedures for the OPT9608 platform and provides a basis for
preparing tests in specific networks.
Commissioning procedures include:
 Site commissioning tests, performed at the site level to ensure proper functionality of the site
 Service commissioning tests, performed at the network level to ensure proper data functionality of
the integrated network
The following main subjects are covered in this chapter:
 Test equipment
 Site commissioning tests
 Service commissioning tests

NOTE: Personnel involved in the execution and supervision of commissioning tests must be
familiar with the applicable safety precautions and requirements.

8.1 Test equipment


The following test equipment is recommended for the commissioning procedures:
 Optical Spectrum Analyzer
 Data transmission test equipment for testing Ethernet transmission performance
 Optical Power Meter (OPM)
 Set of optical attenuators with various values
 Variable optical attenuator
 Fibers
 Power Meter
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers and therefore no specific models are
listed. You can use any equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory
measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and environmental conditions applying to
the specific network. If necessary, contact Customer Support for specific recommendations.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Commissioning tests

8.1.1 Site commissioning tests


Site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of OPT9604/OPT9608/OPT9624 NEs. Perform the
following procedures on each NE at each site:
 Verify the cards and modules installed in each platform.
 Perform a visual inspection and mechanical checks.
 Measure optical levels (see reference data in the Apollo 96xx Product Line System Specifications).

8.1.2 Check cards and modules installed in each platform


This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have been installed in each site,
and to record their options, revisions, boot version, and serial numbers.
The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and modules installed in an OPT9608
platform.

Table 8-1: Card and module inventory

Card/Module type Slot Option Revision Boot version Serial number


RCP RCP-A
RCP RCP-B
FCM FCU
PFM PFM-A
PFM PFM-B
OA 0 to 7

8.1.3 Visual inspection and mechanical checks


Visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing and connection of cables, and
other tasks related to equipment installation, as follows:
 Equipment installation provides the criteria for proper equipment installation.
 The site cabling diagram provides the criteria for proper cabling routing.
After completing the visual inspection tasks (Items 1 through 11 in the following table), power on the
OPT9604/OPT9608/OPT9624 platform to perform an additional set of acceptance tests (Items 12 through
18 in the following table). These tests check the functions needed for continuing the execution of the
network commissioning tests. Consult the OPT96xx Reference Manual for a description of the various card
indicators and their functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual inspection and mechanical
check.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Commissioning tests

Table 8-2: Visual inspection and mechanical check

No. Description of inspection/check Results


1 Check mechanical mounting of the rack.
2 Check the OPT9604/OPT9608/OPT9624 installation.
3 Check the ODF, upper and lower fiber/cable guides installation and fiber connection
(if applicable).
4 Check the DDF installation and relevant cable connections (if applicable).
5 Check the grounding cable connections.
6 Check the DC power cable connections (main fuse to RAP, RAP fuse to
OPT9604/OPT9608/OPT9624 platform).
7 Check the network manager station installation (if applicable).
8 Check the installation of modules and cards.
9 Check the connection of relevant cables or fibers for all cards installed.
10 Provide DC supply voltage via the first DC source to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
11 Provide DC supply voltage via the second DC source to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
12 Power on the platform.
13 Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources by disconnecting one source
at a time.
14 Check the communications between the OPT9604/OPT9608/OPT9624 platform and
the Telnet console via the LOCAL MNG. Ethernet interface on the RCP.
15 Check the proper operation of all fans.
16 Check LED operation by pressing the LED-TEST pushbutton on the RCP card.
17 Check slot assignment for all relevant cards and modules.
18 Check that there are no abnormal alarms.

8.1.4 Measuring optical levels


These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Perform these measurements using an OPM configured according to the wavelength at the measurement
port. For reliable measurement, do not connect the OPM directly to a port but use a 2-meter fiber. When
measuring high optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that the power does not exceed the
maximum OPM input level.
The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the optical level measurements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Commissioning tests

Table 8-3: Measured optical levels

Slot Module type Port Wavelength Optical transmit level (dBm) Receive level (dBm)

8.1.5 Platform power-on test


Follow the procedure below to test the OPT9608 power-on process.

To power on the NE:


1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the platform.
2. After 10 seconds, turn the platform circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the platform circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without user intervention and without
any abnormal alarms in the system.

8.1.6 Service commissioning tests


The Service Commissioning Tests check that the functionality is in accordance with system specifications.
This section integrates various functional tests at the Optic level to ensure proper functionality of the
integrated network and should be performed after the entire network is complete.

8.1.7 Stability test


This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can function with no errors for a
defined period of time.

To perform a stability test:


1. Create services between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of the other NE (in the
relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the service type.
4. Set the transmit rate in the test equipment to (about 90% in ETH traffic case) of the trail bandwidth.
5. Run this test for two hours and verify that no errors appear in the test equipment.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Commissioning tests

8.1.8 Path protection tests


The purpose of this test is to verify that the protected traffic in the customer network worked properly
when the failure took place.
This test can be performed only if the customer has protection trails.

To perform path protection tests:


1. Create protected optic paths in the network
2. Connect test equipment to both ports.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the service type.
4. Disconnect Rx fiber in the Demux active path of the optic channel that is closed to the test
equipment-
 Confirm that short burst of alarm appears in the test equipment less than 50msec.
 The Management station report alarm on the active path.
 The optic channel works properly on the protection path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber -
 The optic channel remains on the protection path - non-retrieve mode.
 Confirm "no alarm" in the test equipment.

8.1.9 System recovery and reset tests


These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer overflow condition or a power
failure.

To perform system recovery and reset tests:


1. Create two EPL services between two NEs, and do not set rate limiting.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports in the other NE (in the
relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate and for any frame size.
4. Power off the NE and verify packet loss in the test equipment.
5. Power on the NE, wait five minutes, and verify that the errors in the test equipment have cleared.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Commissioning tests

8.1.10 Throughput and latency tests


These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network and the maximum amount
of data that can pass through the network before frames are lost.

To perform throughput and latency tests:


1. Create two Ethernet Private Line (EPL) services between two NEs, and do not set rate limiting.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of another NE (in the relevant
endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 throughput and latency measurement.
4. Measure the throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes,
and record the results in the following table.

Table 8-4: Throughput and latency test results


LAN port and speed 64 bytes/ 128 bytes/ 256 bytes/ 512 bytes/ 1024 bytes/ 1280 bytes/ 1518 bytes/
frame frame frame frame frame frame frame
Throughput

Latency

NOTE: Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths. For a single path, the
latency is 50% of the measured value.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-6


9 Maintenance
This chapter provides maintenance procedures, including preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and
repair of OPT9608 equipment.

9.1 Test equipment, tools, and materials


For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only a craft terminal and a multimeter are
required. The tools and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be available during
maintenance.

9.2 Preventive maintenance


Preventive maintenance activities keep the OPT9608 hardware in good condition and detect and correct
any condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction as soon as possible.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the procedures used in your
organization.

Table 9-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks

Item Inspection/Check Intervals*


W M Q
1. Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check for correct routing (no X
sharp bends) and proper support to avoid stress. Avoid touching fibers during the
inspection, except as required to correct problems.
2. Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals, grounding, and so on, X
and pay special attention to any signs of corrosion.
3. Check condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. Clean as necessary with X
approved cleaning agents.
4. Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air conditioners, lighting, X
distribution panels, etc.) and their power sources.
5. Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by protective covers. Add X
covers as necessary.
6. Check that cards and modules are securely attached: all extractor handles must be X
in the storage position and all module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only
manually).
7. Check for proper operation of the FCM (no abnormal noise and vibrations) in all X
NEs.
8. Check that the FCM is fully inserted in its chassis position and that its screws are X
tight.
9. Clean the FCM and inspect the air filters. Clean or replace the air filters if X
necessary.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

Item Inspection/Check Intervals*


W M Q
10. Clean all areas around the platform in the rack and the rack's front door (if X
applicable), using a vacuum cleaner.
11. Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources (main and backup) to the X
RAP/PDU are properly connected.
12. Check that the external alarm cables are properly connected to the RAP/PDU. X
13. Check from NMS/EMS that there are no unexpected alarm indications on the ports, X
cards and modules.
14. Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer sounds when the TEST X
pushbutton on the RAP panel is pressed.
Note: The buzzer will not sound if the ACO is active.
15. Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when the LED TEST pushbutton on the X
RCP card panel is pressed.
16. Perform a visual check of LED indications. X

*Legend: W weekly M monthly Q quarterly

9.2.1 Air filter preventive maintenance


9.2.1.1 Maintenance intervals
Air particles trapped by the air filter increase the resistance to airflow and can eventually decrease airflow
until it is below the minimum required for proper cooling of internal components. The resulting increase in
the internal temperature of the equipment reduces reliability and performance. Therefore, whenever an air
filter is installed, it must periodically be cleaned or replaced with a clean filter.

CAUTION: Prevent operating the OPT9608 platform without the air filter installed. Fans
operating without an air filter can draw in small particles of material that could cause damage
to the platform components.

Throughout the electronics equipment industry, the acceptable recommendation is to clean or replace air
filters approximately every 90 days. However, the cleaning intervals depend on the specific environmental
conditions. In dusty environments, more frequent cleaning is required. Note that foam filters, which are
used in OPT96xx series platforms, efficiently trap particles without showing face loading of contaminants,
and therefore visual inspection cannot be used to determine cleaning intervals.

CAUTION: Filter cleaning intervals must strictly be observed, as clogging by trapped particles
can severely impair equipment reliability and performance.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.2.1.2 Recommended cleaning methods


Use the following methods (listed in order of ascending efficiency) to clean air filters:
1. Vacuum clean: A few passes of a vacuum cleaner remove accumulated dust and dirt in seconds. Point
the air nozzle in the direction of operating airflow (vacuum from intake side toward exhaust side).
2. Blow with compressed air: Point a compressed air nozzle in the opposite direction of the operating
airflow (blow from the exhaust side toward the intake side).

NOTE: Oily residues and moisture reduce cleaning efficiency of the above methods; in such
cases, clean the filter using method No. 4, or replace the filter.

3. Cold water rinse: Under normal service conditions, the foam media used in the filters require no oily
adhesives. Therefore, collected dust and dirt can be washed away using a standard hose nozzle with
plain water. Stand the filter until completely dry and free of moisture, and return to service.
4. Immersion in warm soapy water: Where stubborn airborne dirt is present, the filter may be dipped in
a solution of warm water and mild detergent. Then simply rinse in clear water, stand until completely
dry and free of moisture, and return to service.
The recommended method is No. 4, as it ensures thorough cleaning of all types of contaminants under any
reasonable service conditions.

9.2.1.3 Cleaning the air filter


This section describes the preventive maintenance for the OPT9608 platform air filter.

NOTE: The air filter can be removed and reinstalled while the OPT9608 platform is in
operation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

To clean the air filter:


1. Release the two captive screws fastening the filter front panel and remove the panel, as shown in the
following figure.

2. Keep the panel in a safe place until it can be reinstalled. Pull the filter out.
3. Inspect the filter for damage. If any damage (for example, holes or torn material) is evident, replace
the filter with a new one.

CAUTION: Replace the filter only with a filter of the original type. Failure to do so can impair
equipment reliability and performance.

Clean the filter using the method selected by your organization (see Recommended cleaning methods).
4. Identify the filter's air intake side indicated by a coding tab (see the above figure).
5. Insert the clean filter into the FCM housing with the air intake side facing to the right, and slide it
forwards until its front edge is flush with the front of the module.
6. Reinstall the filter cover and fasten it to the FCM with its two captive screws.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.2.2 Maintaining optical fibers


Many factors, such as mishandling, lint, and dust particles, can affect the life span and performance of
optical fibers. You can help ensure the long life and best possible performance of your cables by following
these guidelines:
 Never bend optical fiber beyond its minimum bend radius (refer to the cable manufacturer's
specifications).
 Do not let fibers hang free from their connectors and dangle to the floor; doing so can put strain on
the fibers. Use tie wraps to bundle and support the fibers.
 Routinely inspect optical fibers for any sharp bends or kinks and replace any damaged fiber.
 Place safety covers over any open ports to prevent exposure to laser radiation and to keep the ports
free from debris.

WARNING:
 Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of optical ports when no fiber
cable is connected to them. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open apertures.
 Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments.

9.2.2.1 Clean optical fiber connectors


You need the following materials to clean the fiber-optic connectors:
 Spray duster (commonly referred to as "canned air"), available from any electronics or photography
store.
 Foam-head swabs, available from any electronics or photography store.
 Isopropyl alcohol.

To clean optical fiber connectors:


1. Remove any dust particles from the connector by holding the spray duster approximately 5 cm (2 in.)
from the end of the connector and applying three to five short blasts of air.
2. Clean the connector by moistening the end of a foam-head swab with alcohol and then wiping the
entire surface of the connector with the swab.
3. Dry the connector by holding the spray duster approximately 5 cm (2 in.) from the connector and
applying three to five short blasts of air.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.3 Onsite troubleshooting


The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the malfunction and return the
equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following conditions:
 Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
 Alarm or malfunction detected onsite by maintenance personnel, either as a result of a
troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center personnel or as a result of a periodic
inspection or preventive maintenance action. Many problems can be detected via the various
indicators on the OPT9608 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the OPT9608, with Ethernet and MPLS technologies, and with the
LightSoft and STMS management stations. Refer to the respective user manual for details on the various
capabilities of the management stations, and for instructions on performing the necessary activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite troubleshooting for various trouble
categories. For each category, a troubleshooting table provides instructions for identifying the problem.

To use the troubleshooting table:


1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under “Symptoms”.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under “Corrective actions” in the order they appear,
until the trouble is corrected.

9.3.1 Troubleshooting power problems


Table 9-2: Troubleshooting power problems
Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions
RAP POWER ON Both main and backup power 1. Check the site power distribution system.
indicator is off. sources failed. 2. Check the DC voltage at the main and backup power terminals of the RAP.
3. If the voltage is not within the correct range, check cable connections up to the DC
power distribution panel, and make sure no fuses are blown.
4. Check the voltage supplied by the main and backup power sources.
5. Check the power connections to the RAP.
6. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if necessary.
Equipment problem. 7. Check the voltage at the PFM end of each power cable. Replace the cable or repair
the RAP if there is no voltage present.
8. If after checking (as above) and reconnecting a cable to the equipment, the circuit
breaker trips again, replace the corresponding PFM module.
9. If the problem occurs again after Step 8, remove all the cards and modules from the
platform and reinsert them one by one until you find the component causing the
circuit breaker to trip. Replace that component.
PFM ACTIVE indicator No input power to the 1. Check the corresponding circuit breaker in the RAP; reset any tripped breaker.
is off. corresponding unit. 2. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if necessary.
3. If the circuit breaker trips again, disconnect the cable protected by the corresponding
circuit breaker from the equipment and check the voltage polarity.
4. Check the power cable condition and make sure that the cable is not damaged and
does not cause short circuits.
5. Check proper cable connection at both ends.
PFM FAIL indicator Technical failure in the  Replace the unit.
lights. corresponding unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.3.2 Troubleshooting cooling system problems


The following table lists the possible problems that can occur in the cooling system and the actions you can
take to correct them.

Table 9-3: Troubleshooting cooling system problems


Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions
FCM FAIL indicator lights. (This Defective fan.  Replace the FCM.
indicates that one or more of the fans
has stopped operating or dropped
below the minimum required
operating speed. The operational fans
will speed up to compensate for the
malfunctioning fans.)
Fault in FCM power  Replace the FCM.
supply.
All FCM fans are running at high The platform 1. If an overtemperature condition exists, the problem is not in
(Turbo) speed. reached the cooling system; the FCM fans are designed to operate at
overtemperature higher speeds under this condition.
condition (i.e., the 2. If an overtemperature condition does not exist, the fans are
operating out of sync. Contact Customer Support for assistance.
temperature
exceeded 113°F
[45°C]).
FCM's ACT. indicator doesn't light. This The FCM is not  Remove and then reinstall the FCM, ensuring that it is properly
indicates that the unit is not receiving seated well. seated.
power.
The FCM is 1. Remove the FCM and replace it with a spare fan tray. (Do not
malfunctioning. operate the platform for more than a few minutes without an
operational FCM tray installed.).
2. If the ACT. indicator on the replaced FCM lights up, the other
tray is defective and must be replaced.
3. If the ACT. indicator on the replaced FCM doesn't lights up, a
problem may exist on the chassis where the FCM connects to
the backplane. Contact Customer Support for assistance.

9.3.3 Troubleshooting using component indicators


The STMS management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators. These indicators, located on
the various cards and modules, can help you to rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component
in accordance with the procedures outlined in the following tables.

NOTE: See a description of indicator functions in the OPT96xx Reference Manual.

CAUTION: The following corrective actions are traffic-affecting.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

Table 9-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules


Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions
Green ACT. indicator is off. Defective indicator  Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the RCP card,
and check that the indicator lights. If not, replace
the card/module.
Defective card/module 1. Remove the card/module and wait a minute before reinserting.
Make sure that you fully insert the card or module in its slot.
2. If the ACT. indicator does not turn on after reinsertion, replace
the card/module.
Red FAIL indicator does not Defective card/module 1. Remove the card/module and wait a few minutes before
turn off after software reinserting. Make sure the ACT. indicator turns on after the
download (this occurs after card/module is reinserted.
power-on and resetting). 2. The FAIL indicator must light together with the STBY and ACT
indicators while software is downloaded to the card/module.
Wait until the software download is complete and check that
the FAIL indicator turns off.
3. If the FAIL indicator turns on again, replace the card/module.
The status LEDs (ACT., STBY, Card/module not seated 1. Remove and then reinstall the card/module, ensuring that it is
FAIL) on an individual card are well or defective. properly seated and secured to the chassis with captive
not lit up. screws.
2. If none of the status LEDs turns on, replace the card/module.
A Service card transceiver Rx or Defective Rx or/and Tx 1. Make sure the Rx and Tx fiber cables are in good condition,
Tx indicator lights Red. fibers. correctly installed, and connected to an active device.
2. Replace the Rx and Tx fiber cables.
A Service card displays a Yellow Problem with the  Go to the device connected to the transceiver and
Rx or Tx LED. (This indicates a connected device. make sure that it is properly configured and
problem with the device to
which the fiber cable is receiving/transmitting traffic.
connected.)

CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer
(OTDR), it is the user's responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so may
damage the receiver irreparably.

Table 9-5: General troubleshooting procedures for SFP/XFP transceiver plug-ins


No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions
1 Green transceiver state The corresponding 1. When available, press the LASER-ON pushbutton of the
indicator is off. optical transmitter may RCP to activate the corresponding laser.
have been turned off by 2. If the problem persists, the laser automatically turns off
the ALS function (see again after a few seconds. Check that all the fibers are
note below). properly connected to the corresponding transceiver.
3. Reinsert the transceiver. If the problem persists, replace
the transceiver.

NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its transmitter when the corresponding
receive signal is lost. Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction that turns the
optical signals off in a whole section of the network and generates a large number of alarms.
As a result, it may be difficult to identify the real cause of the problem, and you may need to
use the management station log records to identify the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.4 Replacing cards and modules


9.4.1 Safety and workmanship
Refer to Installing OPT9608: before you start safety guidelines for safety and workmanship instructions.

CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices


PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
OPT9608 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To prevent ESD damage, strictly
observe all the precautions listed in Protection against ESD. Keep parts and cards in their
antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install them.
Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded equipment frame or rack when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection to internal connectors.

When inserting cards and modules, make sure to align the card or module carefully with the platform guide
rails. If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the card/module and repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it slowly and carefully to
avoid touching components located on adjacent cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure that there are no signs of
physical damage. In particular, check for bent connector pins.
Before replacing any card, module, NVM, or optical transceiver:
1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to
detect damage during shipment. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component identification labels, and
make sure they are compatible with those of the component to be replaced.
After replacing a component:
4. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
5. Attach a report to the package explaining the reason for the replacement, and identify the network
site, physical location, platform, and time of replacement.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.4.2 Install and remove component cards


This section contains instructions for installing and removing the OPT9608 platform component cards. All
cards are hot-swappable.
Although you can insert and remove component cards without powering off the platform, you should be
aware of how packet processing is affected when a card is removed.
The following table describes the effects of removing the OPT9608 platform component cards.

Table 9-6: Effects of card removal on system


Card Effect on system
RCP Stops forwarding packets to and from all cards. If a redundant RCP and High Availability features are
enabled, routing and forwarding are not affected by removal of one of the RCPs.
Service Stops forwarding packets to and from the card.

For card installation instructions, see Card and module installation.

9.4.3 Replace RCP cards

CAUTION: Before attempting to remove the card, monitor its NVM (orange) indicator.
Remove the card only after this indicator has been off for at least 2 minutes.

To replace the RCP:


1. Identify the RCP card to be removed.
2. If the platform has two RCP cards (which means it supports RCP redundancy), first initiate a forced
switching to the other RCP.
3. Wait until the NVM (orange) indicator of the RCP to be replaced turns off and remains off for at least
2 minutes, and then remove the NVM card as described in Replacing the NVM on RCP cards. It is
recommended to wait until the yellow indicator of the other RCP card turns off.
4. Remove any cabling connected to the RCP.

CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting the RCP into the platform, release the extractor
handles by pressing the latches at the handle edges outward, and then pull/push both handles
simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.

5. Follow the procedure in Inserting/extracting a card with modified extractors to remove the card.
If necessary, transfer the NVM from the replaced RCP card to its replacement (see Replacing the NVM on
RCP cards).
6. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card guides.
7. Follow the procedure in Inserting/extracting a card with modified extractors to install the
replacement card.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.4.4 Replace the NVM on RCP cards

CAUTION: Currently NVM replacement is supported on non-active RCP cards only. You must
force switching to the other RCP card before attempting to replace the NVM.

To replace the NVM:


1. If the platform has two RCP cards (which means it supports RCP redundancy), first force switching to
the other RCP.
2. Wait until the NVM (orange) indicator of the RCP on which the NVM is to be replaced turns off, and
remains off for at least 2 minutes.
3. Open the two captive screws fastening the NVM cover to the RCP.
4. Press the NVM release pushbutton using the NVM cover's edge as an extractor tool.
5. Carefully extract the NVM from the RCP.
6. Orient the replacement NVM in the correct position and push it straight into its socket.
7. Replace the NVM cover and fasten it to the RCP with its two captive screws.
At this stage, you may either wait for the automatic updating of the database stored on the new NVM (this
may take up to one hour), or immediately force a switching to the RCP on which the NVM has been
replaced.

9.4.5 Replace I/O modules


To replace I/O modules:
1. Identify the I/O module to be removed.
2. Remove any cabling connected to the I/O module.

CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting the I/O module, release the extractor handles by
pressing the latches at the handle edges outward and then pulling/pushing both handles
simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the module.

3. Follow the procedure in Inserting or extracting a card with modified extractors to remove the module.
4. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding card guides.
5. Follow the procedure in Inserting or extracting a card with modified extractors to install the
replacement I/O module.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.4.6 Replace SFP/XFP transceivers


Field-replaceable SFP/XFP transceivers are supplied. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the
safety precautions described in Laser device operating precautions during the replacement.

To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver:


1. Mark each fiber connected to the transceiver for identification purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed position, and push
slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the corresponding optical interface module
connector until the transceiver clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before
the transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.

6. Reconnect the fibers disconnected in Step 3.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

9.4.7 Replace the FCM


The FCM can be replaced without disconnecting the power from the OPT9608 platform.

CAUTION: To prevent the platform overheating, complete the replacement within four
minutes.

To replace the FCM:


1. Prepare the replacement FCM so you can install it immediately after removing the old FCM. In
particular, carefully inspect the interior of the FCM to ensure that no foreign matter, for example
packaging chips, is present inside the unit.
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the FCM to the platform.

CAUTION: When removing the FCM, be careful not to touch the internal fans which may still
be rotating.

3. Carefully remove the FCM by slowly pulling it out of the platform. Be aware that the internal fans may
still be rotating.
4. Insert the replacement FCM in the corresponding platform guides, and push it in carefully until the
FCM fully engages the mating internal connector of the OPT9608 platform. Make sure that the FCM
front panel is flush with the platform frame front edges. As the FCM is plugged into its mating
connector, the green ACTIVE indicator on its panel should turn on.
5. Fasten the FCM to the platform by its two captive screws.

9.5 Replace RAP components


This section describes how to replace RAP components identified as faulty via the troubleshooting
procedures described in this section.

9.5.1 Replace xRAP-100 circuit breakers


xRAP-100 circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot swapping).

To replace the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the cover
(see the following figure).
2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of its socket.
3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced circuit breaker.

WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with a fuse of the same
type and rating.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the corresponding xRAP-100
power terminal board, as shown in the following figure.
5. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.
Figure 9-1: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers

9.5.2 Replace RAP-4B circuit breakers


RAP-4B circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot swapping).

To replace the RAP-4B circuit breakers:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover to its chassis and remove the cover
(see the following figure).
2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of its socket.
3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced circuit breaker.

WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with a fuse of the same
type and rating.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance

4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the corresponding RAP-4B
power terminal board, as shown in the following figure.
5. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.
Figure 9-2: Replacing xRAP-100 circuit breakers

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-15


10 Connector pin assignments
Connection data is only provided for user connectors located in Apollo 96xx platforms and associated
ancillary equipment. Connection data is not provided for connectors reserved for use by technical support
personnel and/or for future expansion, to which no user equipment may be connected.

10.1 PFM DC input power connector


The DC input power connector located on the PFM is a 2-pin D-type male connector. The following figure
identifies the functions of the power in connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 10-1: PFM power input connector pin functions

10.2 FCM ALARMS connector


The ALARMS connector on the FCM is a 36-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines:
 Five external alarm input lines referenced to an internal power supply common line (the power
supply’s common line is floating relative to the chassis ground). The alarm input lines are monitored
by the OPT9608 management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode of an
optocoupler.
 Three external alarm outputs/inputs. Each output is provided by three relay dry contacts. These lines
can be configured as additional alarm inputs by the system’s management.
 Four severity alarm outputs and a buzzer control line. Each output is provided by three relay dry
contacts. The buzzer control line is provided by two dry contacts.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state and 1A in closed state.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists
the pin assignment for the ALARMS connector.
Figure 10-2: ALARMS connector pin identification

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

The ALARMS connector can be connected in several configurations to your alarm collecting facility. It can
be connected directly to your distribution frame or via the RAP rack alarm panel to your facility.
Appropriate cables available for each of the configurations are described in the following sections.

Table 10-1: ALARMS connector pin assignment


Pin Designation Function Direction Pin Designation Function Direction
1 GND Ground - 19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC Output
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + Input 20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO Output
wire
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – Input 21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm Output
wire common
4 ALM_IP2 Alarm input 2, + Input 22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC Output
wire
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, – Input 23 MAJ_COM Major alarm Output
wire common
6 ALM_IP3 Alarm input 3, + Input 24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO Output
wire
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, – Input 25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC Output
wire
8 ALM_IP4 Alarm input 4, + Input 26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO Output
wire
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, – Input 27 MIN_COM Minor alarm Output
wire common
10 ALM_O4NO Alarm output 4 NO Output 28 ALM_O4NC Alarm output 4 Output
NC
11 N/C Not connected - 29 N/C Not connected -
12 ALM_O1NO Alarm output 1 NO Output 30 ALM_O4 Alarm output 4 Output
common
13 ALM_O1 Alarm output 1 Output 31 ALM_O3NO Alarm output 3 Output
common NO
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC Output 32 ALM_O3 Alarm output 3 Output
common
15 ALM_O2NO Alarm output 2 NO Output 33 ALM_O3NC Alarm output 3 Output
NC
16 ALM_O2 Alarm output 2 Output 34 GND Ground -
common
17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output 2 NC Output 35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm Input
activation line
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Output 36 N/C Not connected -

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

10.2.1 Alarms client cable


This cable provides a direct connection between the OPT9608 and the customer’s distribution frame. The
cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on one end which connects to the ALARMS connector, and open
wires for connecting to the customer’s facility on the other end. The following table lists the pin assignment
in the SCSI connector, and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin for the connection
between the OPT9608 ALARMS connector and a distribution frame.

Table 10-2: ALARMS client cable wiring

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 GND Ground — Brown
2 — Not connected — —
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – wire Input Brown/gray-ring
4 — Not connected — —
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, – wire Input Red
6 — Not connected — —
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, – wire Input Red/gray-ring
8 N/C Not connected — —
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, – wire Input Orange
10 — Not connected — —
11 ALM_IN5 Alarm input 5, – wire Input Orange/gray-ring
12 ALM_01NO/IN6 Alarm output 1NO Output/Input Yellow
/input 6,– wire
13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 common Output/Input Yellow/gray-ring
/input 6, + wire
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC Output Green
15 ALM_O2NO/ Alarm output 2 NO/ Output/Input Green/gray-ring
IN7 input 7,– wire
16 ALM_O2/IP7 Alarm output 2 common/ Output/Input Blue
/input 7, + wire
17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output 2 NC Output Blue/gray-ring
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input Violet
19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC Input White
20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO Input White/gray-ring
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common Input Pink
22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC Input Pink/gray-ring
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input Brown/white-ring
24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO Input Red/white-ring
25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC — Orange/white-ring
26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO Input Yellow/white-ring
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input Green/white-ring
28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC Input Blue/white-ring
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common — Violet/white-ring
30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO — Light gray/
white-ring
31 ALM_03NO/IN8 Alarm output 3 NO/ — Red/brown-ring
input 8,– wire
32 ALM_03/IP8 Alarm output 3 common/ Input Yellow/brown-ring
input 8, + wire
33 ALM_03NC Alarm output 3 NC Input Orange/brown-ring
34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm sense 2 — —
35 BUZ_NO Buzzer common Input Violet/gray-ring
36 EXTA_SN1 External alarm sense 1 — —

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

10.3 RCP connectors


10.3.1 EXP1 and EXP2 connectors
The EXP1 and EXP2 ports are for future use.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists
the pin out for a 1000BaseT interface.
Figure 10-3: EXP1 and EXP2, pin identification

Table 10-3: EXP1 and EXP2 connector pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction


1 DA- Transmit/Receive, pair 1, – wire I/O
2 DA+ Transmit/Receive, pair 1, + wire I/O
3 DB- Transmit/Receive, pair 2, – wire I/O
4 DB+ Transmit/Receive, pair 2, + wire I/O
5 DC- Transmit/Receive, pair 3, – wire I/O
6 DC+ Transmit/Receive, pair 3, + wire I/O
7 DD- Transmit/Receive, pair 4, – wire I/O
8 DD+ Transmit/Receive, pair 4, + wire I/O

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

10.3.2 LOCAL MNG. connector


The LOCAL MNG. port provides a local management interface for connecting to an LCT. The connection is
via an 8-pin RJ-45 connector wired as Ethernet 10/100BaseT.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists
the pin out for a 10/100BaseT interface.
Figure 10-4: LOCAL MNG, pin identification

Table 10-4: LOCAL MNG connector pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction


1 TD– Transmit, – wire Output
2 TD+ Transmit, + wire Output
3 RD– Receive, – wire Input
6 RD+ Receive, + wire Input

10.3.3 CONSOLE connector


The CONSOLE port provides a serial RS-232 communication interface for use by technical support staff for
debugging, maintenance, etc. The connection is via an 8-pin, RJ-45 connector wired as an RS-232 interface.
The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists
the pin out for a RS-232 interface.
Figure 10-5: CONSOLE, pin identification

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Table 10-5: CONSOLE connector pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction


1 -- Not used --
2 -- Not used --
3 Tx Transmit Output
4 GND Ground --
5 -- Not used --
6 Rx Receive Input

10.4 xRAP-100 connectors


This section describes the xRAP-100 connectors.

10.4.1 Shelf DC input power connectors


The Shelf DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 are 3-pin D-type male
connectors. The Shelf 4 connector is a 5-pin D-type male connector that can be connected to regular or
high-power platforms. The following figure identifies the functions of the platform DC input connectors
pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 10-6: DC input power connectors pin functions

10.4.2 xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connectors


The four ALARM connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector can be connected to the
ALARMS connector of an OPT9608 platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen
when looking into the connector).
Figure 10-7: RAP-E SHELF ALARM connector pin identification

The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Table 10-6: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction


1 N/C -- --
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, - wire Input
4 ALM_IP2 Alarm input 2, + wire Input
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, - wire Input
6 ALM_IP3 Alarm input 3, + wire Input
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, - wire Input
8 ALM_IP4 Alarm input 4, + wire Input
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, - wire Input
10 N/C -- --
11 N/C -- --
12 GND Ground --
13 ALM_O1 Alarm output 1 common Output
14 N/C -- --
15 GND Ground --
16 ALM_O2 Alarm output 2 common Output
17 N/C -- --
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input
19 N/C -- --
20 GND Ground --
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common --
22 N/C -- --
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input
24 GND Ground --
25 N/C -- --
26 GND Ground --
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input
28 N/C -- --
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common --
30 GND Ground --
31 N/C -- --
32 N/C -- --
33 N/C -- --
34 N/C -- --

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Pin Name Function Direction


35 GND Ground --
36 N/C -- --

10.4.3 ALARM IN/OUT connector


The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines to the
customer equipment:
 Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the Apollo 96xx platforms. Four
inputs are allocated to each one. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the
customer's facility.
 Eight sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, that serve as rack
(bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each
Apollo 96xx platform connected to the xRAP-100.
 Four sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, that serve as rack
(bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated
by the corresponding alarm relays of Apollo 96xx platforms.
Relay contact ratings are 57.6 V in open state and 1A in closed state.
The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 10-8: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification

The following table lists the pin assignment for the ALARM IN/OUT connector.

Table 10-7: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment


Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color
Shelf 1 1 ALM_01NO Output relay 1, normally open contact Output Black
2 ALM_01COM Output relay 1, common contact Output Brown

3 ALM_01NC Output relay 1, normally closed contact Output Red

4 ALM_02NO Output relay 2, normally open contact Output Orange

5 ALM_02COM Output relay 2, common contact Output Yellow

6 ALM_02NC Output relay 2, normally closed contact Output Green

Shelf 2 7 ALM_03NO Output relay 3, normally open contact Output Blue


8 ALM_03COM Output relay 3, common contact Output Violet

9 ALM_03NC Output relay 3, normally closed contact Output Gray

10 ALM_04NO Output relay 4, normally open contact Output White

11 ALM_04COM Output relay 4, common contact Output Pink

12 ALM_04NC Output relay 4, normally closed contact Output Light Green

Shelf 3 13 ALM_05NO Output relay 5, normally open contact Output Black/White


14 ALM_05COM Output relay 5, common contact Output Brown/White

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color


15 ALM_05NC Output relay 5, normally closed contact Output Red/White

16 ALM_06NO Output relay 6, normally open contact Output Orange/White

17 ALM_06COM Output relay 6, common contact Output Green/White

18 ALM_06NC Output relay 6, normally closed contact Output Blue/White

Shelf 4 19 ALM_07NO Output relay 7, normally open contact Output Violet/White


20 ALM_07COM Output relay 7, common contact Output Red/Black

21 ALM_07NC Output relay 7, normally closed contact Output Orange/Black

22 ALM_08NO Output relay 8, normally open contact Output Yellow/Black

23 ALM_08COM Output relay 8, common contact Output Green/Black

24 ALM_08NC Output relay 8, normally closed contact Output Gray/Black

All platforms 25 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Pink/Black
26 CRIT_NO Critical alarm relay, normally open contact Output Pink/Green

27 CRIT_COM Critical alarm relay, common contact Output Pink/Red

28 MAJ_NC Major alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Pink/Violet

29 MAJ_NO Major alarm relay, normally open contact Output Light Blue

30 MAJ_COM Major alarm relay, common contact Output Light Blue/Brown

31 MIN_NC Minor alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Light Blue/Red

32 MIN_NO Minor alarm relay, normally open contact Output Light Blue/Violet

33 MIN_COM Minor alarm relay, common contact Output Light Blue/Black

34 WARN_COM Warning alarm relay, common contact Output Gray/Green

Shelf 1 35 ALMIN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Red


36 ALM_IN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Violet

37 ALMIN2 External alarm input 2 Input Light Green/Black

38 ALM_IN2 External alarm input 2 Input Violet/Black

39 ALMIN3 External alarm input 3 Input Black/White dots

40 ALM_IN3 External alarm input 3 Input Brown/White dots

41 ALMIN4 External alarm input 4 Input Red/White dots

42 ALM_IN4 External alarm input 4 Input Orange/White dots

Shelf 2 43 ALMIN5 External alarm input 5 Input Green/White dots


44 ALM_IN5 External alarm input 5 Input Blue/White dots

45 ALMIN6 External alarm input 6 Input Violet/White dots

46 ALM_IN6 External alarm input 6 Input White/Black dots

47 ALMIN7 External alarm input 7 Input Yellow/Black dots

48 ALM_IN7 External alarm input 7 Input Green/Black dots

49 ALMIN8 External alarm input 8 Input Light Blue/Black


dots
50 ALM_IN8 External alarm input 8 Input Pink/Black dots

Shelf 3 51 ALMIN9 External alarm input 9 Input Red/Black dots


52 ALM_IN9 External alarm input 9 Input Orange/Black dots

53 ALMIN10 External alarm input 10 Input Violet/Black dots

54 ALM_IN10 External alarm input 10 Input Gray/Black dots

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color


55 ALMIN11 External alarm input 11 Input

56 ALM_IN11 External alarm input 11 Input Orange/Red dots

57 ALMIN12 External alarm input 12 Input Yellow/Red dots

58 ALM_IN12 External alarm input 12 Input Green/Red dots

Shelf 4 59 ALMIN13 External alarm input 13 Input Violet/Red dots


60 ALM_IN13 External alarm input 13 Input Gray/Red dots

61 ALMIN14 External alarm input 14 Input White/Red dots

62 ALM_IN14 External alarm input 14 Input Pink/Red dots

63 ALMIN15 External alarm input 15 Input Yellow/White

64 ALM_IN15 External alarm input 15 Input Gray/White

65 ALMIN16 External alarm input 16 Input Pink/White

66 ALM_IN16 External alarm input 16 Input Brown/Black

All platforms 67 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Blue/Black
68 WARN_NO Warning alarm relay, normally open contact Output Gray/White dots

10.5 RAP-4B connectors


This section describes the RAP-4B connectors.

10.5.1 RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector


The four ALARM connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector can be connected to the
ALARMS connector of an OPT96xx platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen
when looking into the connector).
Figure 10-9: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector, pin identification

The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.

Table 10-8: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction


1 N/C -- --
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, - wire Input
4 ALM_IP2 Alarm input 2, + wire Input
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, - wire Input
6 ALM_IP3 Alarm input 3, + wire Input
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, - wire Input

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Pin Name Function Direction


8 ALM_IP4 Alarm input 4, + wire Input
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, - wire Input
10 N/C -- --
11 N/C -- --
12 GND Ground --
13 ALM_O1 Alarm output 1 common Output
14 N/C -- --
15 GND Ground --
16 ALM_O2 Alarm output 2 common Output
17 N/C -- --
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input
19 N/C -- --
20 GND Ground --
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common --
22 N/C -- --
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input
24 GND Ground --
25 N/C -- --
26 GND Ground --
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input
28 N/C -- --
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common --
30 GND Ground --
31 N/C -- --
32 N/C -- --
33 N/C -- --
34 N/C -- --
35 GND Ground --
36 N/C -- --

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

10.5.2 RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector


The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines to the
customer equipment:
 Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the Apollo 96xx platforms. Four
inputs are allocated to each one. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the
customer's facility.
 Eight sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, that serve as rack
(bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each
Apollo 96xx platform connected to the RAP-4B.
 Four sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, that serve as rack
(bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated
by the corresponding alarm relays of Apollo 96xx platforms.
Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state and 1A in closed state.
The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 10-10: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification

Table 10-9: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment

Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color


Platform 1 1 ALM_01NO Output relay 1, normally open contact Output Black
2 ALM_01COM Output relay 1, common contact Output Brown
3 ALM_01NC Output relay 1, normally closed contact Output Red
4 ALM_02NO Output relay 2, normally open contact Output Orange
5 ALM_02COM Output relay 2, common contact Output Yellow
6 ALM_02NC Output relay 2, normally closed contact Output Green
Platform 2 7 ALM_03NO Output relay 3, normally open contact Output Blue
8 ALM_03COM Output relay 3, common contact Output Violet
9 ALM_03NC Output relay 3, normally closed contact Output Gray
10 ALM_04NO Output relay 4, normally open contact Output White
11 ALM_04COM Output relay 4, common contact Output Pink
12 ALM_04NC Output relay 4, normally closed contact Output Light Green
Platform 3 13 ALM_05NO Output relay 5, normally open contact Output Black/White
14 ALM_05COM Output relay 5, common contact Output Brown/White
15 ALM_05NC Output relay 5, normally closed contact Output Red/White
16 ALM_06NO Output relay 6, normally open contact Output Orange/White
17 ALM_06COM Output relay 6, common contact Output Green/White
18 ALM_06NC Output relay 6, normally closed contact Output Blue/White

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color


Platform 4 19 ALM_07NO Output relay 7, normally open contact Output Violet/White
20 ALM_07COM Output relay 7, common contact Output Red/Black
21 ALM_07NC Output relay 7, normally closed contact Output Orange/Black
22 ALM_08NO Output relay 8, normally open contact Output Yellow/Black
23 ALM_08COM Output relay 8, common contact Output Green/Black
24 ALM_08NC Output relay 8, normally closed contact Output Gray/Black
All platforms 25 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Pink/Black
26 CRIT_NO Critical alarm relay, normally open contact Output Pink/Green
27 CRIT_COM Critical alarm relay, common contact Output Pink/Red
28 MAJ_NC Major alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Pink/Violet
29 MAJ_NO Major alarm relay, normally open contact Output Light Blue
30 MAJ_COM Major alarm relay, common contact Output Light Blue/Brown
31 MIN_NC Minor alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Light Blue/Red
32 MIN_NO Minor alarm relay, normally open contact Output Light Blue/Violet
33 MIN_COM Minor alarm relay, common contact Output Light Blue/Black
34 WARN_COM Warning alarm relay, common contact Output Gray/Green
Platform 1 35 ALMIN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Red
36 ALM_IN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Violet
37 ALMIN2 External alarm input 2 Input Light Green/Black
38 ALM_IN2 External alarm input 2 Input Violet/Black
39 ALMIN3 External alarm input 3 Input Black/White dots
40 ALM_IN3 External alarm input 3 Input Brown/White dots
41 ALMIN4 External alarm input 4 Input Red/White dots
42 ALM_IN4 External alarm input 4 Input Orange/White dots
Platform 2 43 ALMIN5 External alarm input 5 Input Green/White dots
44 ALM_IN5 External alarm input 5 Input Blue/White dots
45 ALMIN6 External alarm input 6 Input Violet/White dots
46 ALM_IN6 External alarm input 6 Input White/Black dots
47 ALMIN7 External alarm input 7 Input Yellow/Black dots
48 ALM_IN7 External alarm input 7 Input Green/Black dots
49 ALMIN8 External alarm input 8 Input Light Blue/Black dots
50 ALM_IN8 External alarm input 8 Input Pink/Black dots
Platform 3 51 ALMIN9 External alarm input 9 Input Red/Black dots
52 ALM_IN9 External alarm input 9 Input Orange/Black dots
53 ALMIN10 External alarm input 10 Input Violet/Black dots
54 ALM_IN10 External alarm input 10 Input Gray/Black dots
55 ALMIN11 External alarm input 11 Input Orange/Red dots
56 ALM_IN11 External alarm input 11 Input Yellow/Red dot

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Connector pin assignments

Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color


57 ALMIN12 External alarm input 12 Input Green/Red dots
58 ALM_IN12 External alarm input 12 Input Blue/Red dots
Platform 4 59 ALMIN13 External alarm input 13 Input Violet/Red dots
60 ALM_IN13 External alarm input 13 Input Gray/Red dots
61 ALMIN14 External alarm input 14 Input White/Red dots
62 ALM_IN14 External alarm input 14 Input Pink/Red dots
63 ALMIN15 External alarm input 15 Input Yellow/White
64 ALM_IN15 External alarm input 15 Input Gray/White
65 ALMIN16 External alarm input 16 Input Pink/White
66 ALM_IN16 External alarm input 16 Input Brown/Black
All platforms 67 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact Output Blue/Black
68 WARN_NO Warning alarm relay, normally open contact Output Gray/White dots

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-15


11 VoIP telephone installation
This Appendix describes the installation and configuration of the VoIP telephone in the Apollo 96xx
platforms. The VoIP telephone is supplied as an optional kit. The kit contains all the necessary installation
components, including a rack shelf that enables convenient placement of the VoIP telephone and its power
supply.
The following table lists the VoIP kit.

11.1 Introduction to VoIP telephone installation


The following table lists the VoIP kit.

Table 11-1: VoIP kit (X39201, A00, 2)

Components Details
Apollo IP Phone GXP1400/1405
Telephone Transformer 36-72VDC/5VDC 3A/15W
VOIP Telephone shelf As per specification

To perform the installation you must know the type of the rack and power supply unit (RAP) being used.
This determines the type of power cable and circuit breaker you need for the installation. The power cables
and circuit breakers are listed in the following tables.

Table 11-2: Power cable types

P/N Cable description Length Comments


ON321379 Cable assy power VoIP box to RAP-4B 2.7 m Use with RAP-4B
ON321380 2.7 m
Cable assy power VoIP box to RAP-E Use with RAP-E Artemis kit
(X56233)
ON321381 Cable assy power VoIP box to xRAP-100 2.7 m Use with xRAP-100

NOTES:
 Depending on the specific configuration, the VoIP telephone can be connected to three
different Rack Alarm Panel (RAP): RAP-E, RAP-4B, or xRAP-100.
 Before the installation make sure that the power cable is suitable for the RAP type that is
either at the site or in the Purchase Order (PO) (see the table above).

Table 11-3: Circuit breaker types

P/N Circuit breaker value Comments


ON315875 1Amp For RAP-4B (small pins)
ON210460 1Amp RAP-E or xRAP-100 (large pins)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

Figure 11-1: VoIP telephone installed in the rack

Figure 11-2: Apollo VoIP Telephone connections

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

11.2 VoIP telephone installation sequence


Install the VoIP telephone using the following sequence of procedures:
1. Attach the VoIP telephone shelf to the rack.

NOTE: The VoIP telephone can be fed from different RAP units
including: RAP-E and xRAP-100. When the description applies to
all RAP types the generic term RAP is used.

2. Remove the RAP front panel and bottom cover.


3. Install terminal brackets on the RAP.
4. Connect the power cable to the RAP:
 If you are using RAP-E, see Connect the VoIP power cable to the RAP-E
 If you are using xRAP-100, see Connect power cable to the xRAP-100
 If you are using RAP-4B, see Connect power cable to the RAP-4B
5. Connect the transformer output power cable to the VoIP telephone.
6. Connect the Ethernet cable from the VoIP telephone to an external management port.

11.2.1 Attach the VoIP telephone shelf to the rack


This procedure is the first step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.

NOTE: Select the appropriate kit for the rack.

To attach the VOIP telephone shelf to the rack:


1. Determine the position of the shelf in the rack.
2. Hold in the shelf in the predetermine position.
3. Screw in the 4 bolts supplied with the kit (2 on each side of the shelf).
4. Place the telephone and power supply on the shelf.
5. Connect the telephone wires according to the bottom drawing in VoIP telephone installation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

11.2.2 Remove the RAP-E front panel and bottom cover


This procedure is the second step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.

To remove the RAP-E front panel:


1. Loosen the two captive screws on both sides of the RAP-E front panel (see the following figure).
2. Remove the panel.

To remove the RAP-E bottom cover:


3. Identify the location of the bottom cover in the RAP-E (see the following figure).
4. Grasp the bottom cover of the RAP-E on both sides and gently extract it.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

11.2.3 Install terminal brackets in the RAP-E


This procedure is the third step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.
The RAP-E supports installation of power supply terminal brackets to enable the connection of the VoIP
telephone to a power source. A kit of terminal brackets is available for this purpose. The kit includes a Wide
bracket that is connected to a positive terminal in the RAP-E and a Narrow bracket that is connected to a
dedicated negative post (see the following figure).

To install terminal brackets in the RAP-E:


1. Identify the two terminal brackets (wide and narrow) in the installation kit according to the following
figure.

WARNING: To avoid injury to personnel or damage to the equipment, make sure to


disconnect the power supply before performing this procedure.

2. Remove the two M6 nuts and M6 locking washers that attach the wide bracket (positive cable lug) to
the RAP-E PCB (Printed Circuit Board).
3. Align the two holes of the wide bracket to the two screws connected to the PCB.
4. Secure the wide bracket using the two locking washers and nuts removed in Step 2. Tighten the nuts
with a torque of 938 N cm to 1062 N cm.
5. Identify the two threaded spacers on the board near the alarm connectors (see the preceding figure)
and place the narrow bracket on them.
6. Secure the narrow bracket (negative cable lug) to the post using two M3 screws from the installation
kit. Fasten the screws with a torque of 40 N cm to 44 N cm.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

11.2.4 Connect the VoIP power cable to the RAP-E


This procedure is the fourth step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.

To connect the VOIP power cable to the RAP_E:


1. Connect the Red (+) cable lug to the terminal located at the top of the Wide bracket (see the following
figure).
2. Connect the Black (-) cable lug to the terminal located at the top of the Narrow bracket (see the
following figure).

3. Remove Phillips screw from the grounding post (located near the J23 marking) on the RAP-E PCB (see
the preceding figure).
4. Insert the Phillips screw through cable lug and fasten the screw into the grounding (GND) post on the
RAP-E PCB (see the preceding figure).
5. Insert the appropriate circuit breaker into its sockets.
6. Make sure that the circuit breaker is in the OFF position.
7. Identify the location of the bottom cover in the RAP-E according to the figure in Removing the RAP-E
front panel and bottom cover.
8. Position the cover horizontally in front of the RAP-E.
9. Slide the cover into the grooves located on both sides of the RAP-E.
10. Reassemble the front panel and fasten it with its two captive screws.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

11.2.5 Connect power cable to the xRAP-100


This procedure is the fourth step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.
The cable for connecting the VoIP telephone to the xRAP-100 has a 3W3 (3-pin), male connector on the side
for the xRAP-100 and a MSTB, 2-pin, female connector on the side for the VoIP power supply.

To connect the VoIP power cable to the xRAP-100:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to the unit and remove the cover.
2. Connect the 3W3 connector of the power cable to a free 3W3 connector on the xRAP-100 board.
3. Fasten the connector's two captive screws to ensure good connectivity.
4. Identify the circuit breaker sockets, corresponding to the connector installed in the previous steps.
5. Insert an appropriate circuit breaker into the sockets. Make sure that the circuit breaker is OFF.
6. Reassemble the xRAP-100 cover and fasten it with the two captive screws.

11.2.6 Connect power cable to the RAP-4B


This procedure is the fourth step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.
The cable for connecting the VoIP telephone to the RAP-4B has three wires terminated with ring-terminals
on the side for the RAP-4B and a MSTB, 2-pin, female connector on the side for the VoIP power supply. The
DC polarity is marked on the wires: "+" (Red wire), "-" (Black wire), and "GND" (Black wire).

To connect the VoIP power cable to the RAP-4B:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover to the unit and remove the cover.
2. Identify the DC output voltage terminal screws on the RAP-4B and their polarity.
3. Connect the Red (+) wire lug to the "+" terminal.
4. Connect the Black (-) wire lug to the "-" terminal.
5. Connect the Black (GND) wire lug to the "GND" terminal, located on the side wall of the RAP-4B.
6. Identify the circuit breaker sockets, corresponding to the terminals connected in the previous steps.
7. Insert an appropriate circuit breaker into the sockets. Make sure that the circuit breaker is OFF.
8. Reassemble the RAP-4B cover and fasten it with the two captive screws.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

11.2.7 Connect power cables to the VoIP telephone


This procedure is the fifth step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.
The -48 VDC power from the corresponding RAP is connected to a DC-DC converter (transformer) that
convert it to 5 VDC for use with the VoIP telephone.

To connect the power cable to the VoIP telephone:


1. Thread the power cable down from the corresponding RAP to the VoIP telephone shelf and attach it
to the side of the rack with cable ties.
2. Insert the 2-pin MSTB connector at the lower end of the power cable (descending from the RAP) into
the -48V input of the telephone transformer.

3. Insert the banana connector from the output power cable of the converter into the VoIP telephone
DC-5V input connector (see the preceding and following figures).

4. Switch ON the 1 Amp circuit breaker in the RAP.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

11.2.8 Connect the ethernet cable to the VoIP telephone


This procedure is the sixth and final step in VoIP telephone installation sequence.
Using the VoIP phone as an orderwire enables you to make voice calls through its control network without
a telephone service provider.

To connect the Ethernet cable to the VoIP telephone:


 Connect a standard CAT5/6 Ethernet cable from the VoIP output port to the corresponding Apollo
96xx Management port (IMG) located on the corresponding IMG port on the CEM or FCM card.

11.3 VoIP software configuration


Configure the VoIP (SIP) phone (Grandstream1405, or equivalent) using the phone configuration menu or
through the web client.
Figure 11-3: VoIP SIP setup

When the system is configured appropriately, a SIP call can be initiated to a SIP phone or through a PBX.
The minimum configuration is:
 At the RCP (Remote Control Processor):
 The fe-rcp (fast ethernet- remote control processor) IP address is to be configured (e.g.
172.55.1.1)
 Netmask of fe-rcp (e.g. 255.255.255.0)
 Request system management mode DCN <W.X.Y.Z>
VoIP (SIP) Phone
 SIP calls over DCN (Data Control Network) – (analogous to OrderWire)
The SIP phones (see the figure in VoIP software configuration) are connected to the IMG port and are
configurable.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

Another SIP phone, or phones, can be connected anywhere on the DCN (e.g. at a remote device).
Figure 11-4: Phone key pad

11.4 Provision the VoIP (SIP) phone


This section describes how to provision the VoIP (SIP) phone.

To provision the VoIP (SIP) phone


1. At the entry screen, press OK.

2. In the main menu, press OK.

Using the navigation keys (see the figure in VoIP telephone), scroll to Network and press OK.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

3. Scroll to IP Setting and press OK.

4. Scroll to Static IP and press OK.

5. Scroll to IP and press OK.

6. In the text box, type the new IP address (using the keypad) and press the OK soft key.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

NOTES:
 Delete the default IP address by pressing the soft key (BkSp).
 To enter a period (.) press the asterisk (*) key.

7. Scroll to Netmask and press OK.

8. In the text box, type a new Netmask address (using the keypad) and press the OK soft key.

NOTES:
 Delete the default IP address by pressing the soft key (BkSp).
 To enter a period (.) press the asterisk (*) key.

9. Scroll to Gateway and press OK.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

10. In the text box, type a new Gateway address (using the keypad) and press the OK soft key.

NOTES:
 Delete the default IP address by pressing the soft key (BkSp).
 To enter a period (.) press the asterisk (*) key.

COMMENT: The Gateway IP address is typically the fe-rcp IP to which it is connected.

11. Scroll to Back and press OK.

12. Scroll to Reboot and press OK.

The VoIP telephone reboots and returns to the entry screen.


This section describes how to validate the IP address of the VoIP (SIP) phone.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

To validate the IP address of the VoIP phone:


1. At the entry screen, press OK to access the main menu.

2. Scroll to Status and press OK.

3. Check and verify the IP address.


4. Return to the main menu and press OK.
The phone is now ready to make a SIP call.
This section describes how to make a VoIP (SIP) phone call.

To make a VoIP phone call:


1. At the entry screen, press OK to access the main menu.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual VoIP telephone installation

2. Scroll to Call History and press OK.

3. Scroll to Direct IP Call and press OK.

4. Enter the IP address of the phone you want to call and press the OK soft key.

NOTES:
 Delete the default IP address by pressing the soft key (BkSp).
 To enter a period (.) press the asterisk (*) key.

Example:
Assuming that your phone IP address is 172.55.1.66, if you make a call to a phone at the IP address:
172.60.2.70, the screen appears as displayed below.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-15


12 Inspection and cleaning of optical
connectors
The major cause of optical fiber failures, or even a whole system failure is contamination of fiber
connection points. Even microscopic dust particles can cause different problems for optical connectors. For
example, a particle that partially or completely blocks the fiber core generates strong back reflections,
which can cause instability to the laser system. Hence, it is most important to keep optical fiber connectors
clean at all times.
When Raman/Hybrid-Raman based optical systems are involved the importance of clean optical connectors
is even critical, as Raman amplifiers use the optical fiber media as part of their operating mechanism.
This Appendix provides optical fiber cleaning procedures that will help you prevent possible failures,
maximize your network performance, and reduce possible required repair costs.

12.1 Optical connector cleanliness


Clean fiber connectors are of utmost importance to ensure failure-free and reliable operation of optical
networks. This section highlights aspects that influence optical fiber cleanliness and performance.
Dirt and contamination on fiber end faces are the main reasons for failures in optical networks.
Accumulation of soil on optical connectors causes insertion loss and back reflections that may block light
transmission.
Repeated connection and disconnection of optical connectors leaves debris in the bulkhead adapter or
receptacle (female/male connector). Dirt can also be transferred from one optical connector to another
when mating them. Make sure to inspect connectors before mating.
The main types of contamination on optical connectors results from the following:
 Dust, from air that can deposit on the endface
 Oils, from human hands touch
 Residues, condensed from vapors in the air
Oil and residues from vapors are more difficult to remove than dust and can even damage the equipment if
not removed.

CAUTION: With high power lasers any contaminant can be burned into the fiber connection if
it blocks the core while the laser is turned on. This burn might damage the optical surface
enough that it cannot be cleaned.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

12.1.1 Handling of optical fibers and components


Several rules must be strictly kept when handling optical fibers and in particular their connection points.
These include safety warnings and notes that must be considered any time you work or maintain networks
that include optical fibers and components.

12.1.1.1 Optical fiber safety notes


Review the following notes before handling optical fibers and optical connectors:
 Turn off any laser source before you inspect fiber connectors/adapters, or optical components
 Make sure that the fiber is disconnected at both ends
 Inspect the connector/adapter before you clean it
 Keep a protective cap on unplugged fiber connectors
 Use the connector housing to plug or unplug a fiber

12.1.1.2 Optical fibers safety warnings


Review the following warnings before handling optical fibers, connectors or components:

LASER WARNING: All personnel involved in equipment installation, operation, and


maintenance must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective
devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe the
applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical connectors,
either directly or using optical instruments.

WARNING: Pay attention to the following warnings before handling optical fiber connectors
and components:
 Don’t use alcohol or wet cleaning without a way to ensure that it does not leave residue
on the end face. It can cause damage to the equipment.
 Don’t look into a fiber or optical connector/adapter while the system laser is on.
 Don’t use unfiltered handheld magnifier or focusing optics to inspect a connector.
 Don’t connect a fiber to a fiberscope while the laser system is on.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

12.2 Inspection and cleaning


The activities involved in cleaning optical fiber connectors include the following main steps:
 Inspection
 Cleaning
 Re-inspection
The inspection is done with a special microscope that can view the optical surface of the fiber edge
(endface). This instrument is referred to as fiberscope later on in this document.
The device also includes a set of different optical adapters required to inspect various types of optical
connectors.
Before connecting any optical component that is connected to another, inspect and clean it as described in
the following flowchart.
Figure 12-1: Inspection flowchart

When handling optical components like attenuators, make sure to inspect the optical connectors on both
sides (male and female) of the element.

NOTE: Optical connector protective covers protect them from dust and scratches, but not
from other contamination sources. Any removal of a protective cover requires connector
inspection.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

12.2.1 Inspection devices


There are two main categories of inspection devices for optical connectors:
 Optical microscope
 Fiber inspection probe
The following figure shows an example of an optical microscope.
Figure 12-2: Handheld microscope

The main features of the optical microscope include:


 Non-removable laser safety filter to protect eyes from direct contact with live fibers.
 Two different types of microscopes required, one to inspect connectors on patch cords, and a
different one to inspect connectors installed on patch panels and equipment.
The fiber inspection probe is connected to an external video screen, PC, or test instrument. The fiber probe
also has a set of adapters that enable to inspect most optical connector types.
Another type of fiber inspection probe is designed with a USB 2.0 interface that connects to a laptop. This
probe also has a wide selection of fiber adapters that enable the inspection of almost every optical
connector. The camera at the end of the probe is purpose-built in conjunction with special software that
drives the probe.
This easy-to-use probe can quickly find and focus a fiber image. Once find, single click of the Quick Capture
button (on the probe) triggers a series of subsecond actions resulting in a complete analysis of the fiber
endface and a pass/fail result.
Upon triggering the Quick Capture button, the system uses the large-format digital sensor to search a wide
area and find the glass fiber. Once found, it captures a full resolution image in a smaller area that is
centered exactly on the fiber. The low magnification image is analyzed separately from the high
magnification image to provide exacting examination on and near the glass fiber, while still evaluating a
wider area for larger debris and damage. These images are stitched together and compared to pass/fail
criteria to provide a non-subjective grading of the image.
The following figure shows fiber inspection probes.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

Figure 12-3: Fiber inspection probes

Each probe has a set of adapters that enable to inspect almost every type of optical connector. The
following figure shows an example of a kit with various adapters.
Figure 12-4: Example of optical adapters kit

The fiber inspection probe provides the following main features:


 The image is displayed on an external video screen, PC, or test instrument
 The eye is protected from direct contact with live light (laser) signal
 The image can be stored for report and documentation
 Facilitates inspection in a dense optical connectors area (like patch panels)
 Ideal for inspection of patch cords, patch panels, and mulitifiber connectors
 Different degrees of magnification available (x100/x200/x400)
 Adapters for all types of connectors.

12.2.2 Inspect optical connectors

 Video fiber inspection probe


or
 Optical microscope
 Set of optical adapters appropriate for the inspection device

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

CAUTION: Before inspecting the optical connectors read the instructions in Optical fibers
safety notes and in Optical fibers safety warnings.

To inspect an optical connector:


1. Before beginning the inspection make sure that the system lasers are turned off.

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Don’t stare into beams or look directly with optical devices.

2. Connect an appropriate adapter on the inspection instrument according to the optical connector you
are inspecting.
3. Insert the optical connector into the adapter, and adjust the focus control to see a clear, focused
endface image.
4. If you are inspecting a connector installed on an equipment piece, insert the video probe with the
appropriate adapter tip into the bulkhead connector and adjust the focus.
5. On the video monitor, make sure that no contamination is present on the connector endface.
A clean connector endface is shown in the following figure.

6. Clean the endface as necessary according to the procedures in Optical connectors cleaning
procedures and reinspect.
Use the following figures to identify different types of contamination on optical connector endface.
Figure 12-5: Connector with dust

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

Figure 12-6: Connector with liquid contamination

Figure 12-7: Connector with alcohol residue contamination

Figure 12-8: Connector with scratches

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-7


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

12.3 Cleaning methods and materials


There are basically two types of optical connectors that require cleaning:
 Connectors on optical fiber patch cords or cables (male connectors)
 Connectors assembled on patch panels and other devices and equipment (female connectors)
The following sections describe materials and procedures suitable for cleaning optical connectors.

12.3.1 Cleaning methods


The following cleaning kits are available on the market for cleaning optical connectors. Each type supports a
different cleaning technique:
 Dry cleaning: cleaning without use of any solvent material.
 Wet cleaning: cleaning with a solvent, typically with IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol).
 Non-Abrasive cleaning: cleaning without abrasive material touching the optical fiber connector. For
example, air dusters or pressured solvent jet used in automated in-situ connector cleaners.
 Abrasive cleaning: cleaning with abrasive materials. Examples are: lint-free wipes, reel-based cleaning
cassette, and optic cleaning swabs.

12.3.2 Dry cleaning materials


Dry cleaning materials include:
 Air spray (air dusters, canned air, compressed air) - air dusters are used to blow loose particles from
the optical fiber connector endface or dry-up solvent (isopropyl alcohol) residue after a wet cleaning.
Figure 12-9: Air spray cleaner

 Cassette fiber connector cleaner - connector cleaning cassette (reel-based) is a dry cleaning method
that is quick, reliable, and gives uniform results. A 2-micrometer weaved polyester cloth is used to
clean optical fiber connectors.
One reel of cleaner tape can be used for over 400 cleanings. Additional replacement tapes are
available and allow continued use of the outer case. This is an abrasive fiber optic cleaning method.
However, the pad underneath the cleaning cloth mitigates this significantly.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-8


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

NOTE: Most of the reel-based fiber connector cleaners require cleaning in one direction as
marked by an arrow on the device.

Cassette fiber connector cleaners are shown in the following figures.


Figure 12-10: Structure of reel connector cleaner

Figure 12-11: Reel cleaner with replacement tape

 Cleaning swabs - are designed for dry cleaning fiber optic connector mating sleeves, bulkhead
adapters, and receptacles and are available in 2.5 mm and 1.25 mm versions.
To clean an endface of connectors already installed in patch panels and hardware devices the stick is
inserted into the bulkhead adapter or receptacle until the tip makes contact with the connector
endface, give a single turn, and then extract the stick and discard.
This is an abrasive fiber optic cleaning method mitigated by a resilient stickhead.
Figure 12-12: Cleaning swabs

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-9


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

Figure 12-13: Cleaning fiber optics bulkhead adapter

Figure 12-14: Cleaning fiber optics receptacle

 Ferrule cleaner - this is a semi-automated fiber optic cleaning method, specially designed for fiber
optic connectors plugged into patch panels and hardware devices.
Figure 12-15: Ferrule cleaning device

Figure 12-16: Ferrule cleaner in operation

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-10


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

12.3.3 Wet cleaning materials


Wet cleaning materials include:
 Alcohol with lint-free wipes: few drops of solvent (typically isopropyl alcohol) are applied to lens
paper which is folded in 4 or 6 layers and laid flat on the table. The user holds the connector vertically
and cleans it in a figure 8 motion. He then follows this action by a mandatory dry cleaning step to
prevent solvent residue, either by air duster or dry lint-free wipes.
Figure 12-17: Alcohol with lint-free wipes

 Alcohol with lint-free swabs: a drop of solvent (typically isopropyl alcohol) is applied to the swab to
lightly moisten it. The swab is then lightly pressed and turned against the connector endface to clean
it.

12.4 Optical connectors cleaning procedures


The following sections describe dry and wet cleaning procedures for optical connectors.

12.4.1 Clean an optical connector with a cleaning cassette

 Cleaning cassette

CAUTION: Before cleaning the optical connectors read the instructions in Optical fibers safety
notes and in Optical fibers safety warnings.

NOTE: The following procedure is suitable for cleaning male optical connectors.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-11


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

The cleaning cassette includes a cleaning band, and has a sprig loaded shutter that exposes only part of the
band required for cleaning. After each shutter closure the band is automatically advanced and when
opened again exposes a new clean part of the band. This ensures that the dirt removed from the connector
endface in a previous cleaning will not be adhered to a connector in a next cleaning action.

To clean an optical connector with a cleaning cassette:


1. Before beginning the cleaning make sure that the system lasers are turned off.

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Don’t stare into beams or look directly with optical devices.

2. Open the cassette shutter with one hand. With the other hand hold the connector at a 90-degree to
the cleaning band surface.
3. Draw the connector endface in a smooth linear motion. Do not press too hard; a light touch cleans
better.

CAUTION: When cleaning observe the following:


 Don’t use a figure 8 motion.
 Don’t use a twist and turn motion, this action can cause lint contamination.

4. Pull the fiber tip lightly down the exposed cleaning area in the direction of the arrow or from top to
bottom.
5. Release the thumb lever to close the cleaning window.
Check the connector with a fiber microscope (see Inspection devices). If the results are not satisfying repeat
the cleaning as necessary.
6. Repeat the inspection and cleaning processes, as necessary.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-12


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

12.4.2 Dry cleaning an optical connector with lint-free wipes

 Lint-free wipes

CAUTION: Before cleaning the optical connectors read the instructions in Optical fibers safety
notes and in Optical fibers safety warnings.

NOTE: The following procedure is suitable for cleaning male optical connectors.

To clean an optical connector with lint-free wipes:


1. Before beginning the cleaning make sure that the system lasers are turned off.

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Don’t stare into beams or look directly with optical devices.

2. Fold the wipe into a square about 4 to 8 layers thick.

CAUTION: Take care not to contaminate the cleaning area of the wipe with your hands or on a
surface during folding.

3. Gently wipe the ferrule tip against the central part of the paper.

CAUTION: Don't scrub the fiber against the wipe. Doing so may cause scratches and more
contamination.

4. Repeat the cleaning on another clean section of the wipe.


5. Properly dispose the wipe. Never reuse a wipe.
6. Inspect the connector with a fiberscope.
7. Repeat the inspection and cleaning processes, as necessary.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-13


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

12.4.3 Dry cleaning with lint-free swabs

 Lint-free swabs

CAUTION: Before cleaning the optical connectors read the instructions in Optical fibers safety
notes and in Optical fibers safety warnings.

NOTE: The following procedure is suitable for cleaning male optical connectors.

To clean an optical connector with lint-free swabs:


1. Before beginning the cleaning make sure that the system lasers are turned off.

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Don’t stare into beams or look directly with optical devices.

2. Lightly press and turn the swab to clean the ferrule face.
3. Properly dispose the used swab. Never reuse a swab.
4. Inspect the connector with a fiberscope.
5. Repeat the inspection and cleaning processes, as necessary.

12.4.4 Dry cleaning with ferrule cleaner device


The ferrule cleaner is a semi-automated device that is customized for cleaning optical connector endface in
a quick and efficient fashion.

 Ferrule cleaner device

CAUTION: Before cleaning the optical connectors read the instructions in Optical fibers safety
notes and in Optical fibers safety warnings.

NOTE: The following procedure is suitable for cleaning male optical connectors.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-14


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

A general view of a ferrule cleaner is shown in the following figure.


Figure 12-18: Ferrule cleaning device

To clean an optical connector with a ferrule cleaner:


1. Before beginning the cleaning make sure that the system lasers are turned off.

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Don’t stare into beams or look directly with optical devices.

2. Insert the ferrule cleaner tip into the connector.


3. Push in until the stopper of the device cleaning guide comes in contact with the connector's ferrule.
4. Depress and release the device button one time.
5. Remove the ferrule cleaner from the connector.
6. Inspect the connector with a fiberscope.
7. Repeat the inspection and cleaning processes, as necessary.

12.4.5 Wet cleaning with lint-free wipes

 Lint-free wipes
 99% Isopropyl alcohol

CAUTION: Before cleaning the optical connectors read the instructions in Optical fibers safety
notes and in Optical fibers safety warnings..

NOTE: The following procedure is suitable for cleaning male optical connectors.

If the dry cleaning with lint-free wipes doesn't provide the required results, try the wet cleaning method
described below.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-15


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

To clean an optical connector with lint-free wipes and ISP alcohol:


1. Before beginning the cleaning make sure that the system lasers are turned off.

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Don’t stare into beams or look directly with optical devices.

2. Fold the wipe into a square about 4 to 8 layers thick.


3. Moisten one section of the wipe with one drop of 99% alcohol. Make sure that a portion of the wipe
remains dry.
4. Lightly wipe the ferrule tip in the alcohol moistened portion of the wipe with a figure 8 motion.

CAUTION: Don't scrub the fiber against the wipe. Doing so may cause scratches and more
contamination.

5. Immediately repeat the figure 8 wiping action on the dry section of wipe to remove any residual
alcohol.
6. Properly dispose the wipe. Never reuse a wipe.
7. Inspect the connector with a fiberscope.
8. Repeat the inspection and cleaning processes, as necessary.

12.4.6 Wet cleaning with lint-free swabs

 Lint-free swabs
 99% Isopropyl alcohol

CAUTION: Before cleaning the optical connectors read the instructions in Optical fibers safety
notes and in Optical fibers safety warnings.

NOTE: The following procedure is suitable for cleaning male optical connectors.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-16


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

To clean an optical connector with lint-free wipes:


1. Before beginning the cleaning make sure that the system lasers are turned off.

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Don’t stare into beams or look directly with optical devices.

2. Lightly moisten a lint-free swab with one drop of 99% alcohol. Do not oversaturate the swab.

NOTE: Prepare in advance a dry lint-free swab available for drying immediately after the wet
cleaning.

3. Lightly press and turn the dampened swab to clean the ferrule face.
4. Immediately after you clean, lightly press and turn the second swab (dry) to dry any alcohol that
remains from the ferrule face.
5. Properly dispose of the wet and dry swab. Never reuse a swab.
6. Inspect the connector with a fiberscope.
7. Repeat the inspection and cleaning processes, as necessary.

12.5 Measure the fiber parameters for Raman-


based or hybrid Raman-based amplifier
The following section is applicable for optical fibers connected to Raman-based or Hybrid Raman-based
amplifiers.
Raman amplifiers use optical fiber media as part of their operating mechanism. This means that the optical
parameters of the fibers can directly influence the operation of the Raman. If the parameters of the optical
fibers deviate more that the allowable limits, it can deteriorate the Raman performance or even stop its
operation.
To ensure smooth operation of Raman-based amplifiers a set of parameter measurements must be
performed before connecting the fibers to the system.

NOTE: Fiber parameters must be measured on both fiber ends.

The measurements are performed using an OTDR with a high dynamic range and include the following
parameters:
 Fiber length
 Total fiber attenuation
 Attenuation profile

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-17


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Inspection and cleaning of optical connectors

 Fiber attenuation (dB/km)


 Splice location
The following figure shows an OTDR example.
Figure 12-19: Typical OTDR

The waveform displayed on the OTDR enables to measure fiber characteristics, including: distances,
attenuations and more.
The following figure shows a typical waveform displayed on the OTDR. The figure also presents several
parameters that can be obtained from the waveform.
Figure 12-20: OTDR waveform example

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-18


13 Standards and references
The following is a list of standards and reference documents that relate to the Apollo 96xx platform product
line. The standards are listed alphabetically by groups.
 Environmental standards
 ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute
 IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
 IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
 IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force
 ISO: International Organization for Standardization
 ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union
 MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum
 NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology
 North American Standards
 OMG: Object Management Group
 TMF: TeleManagement Forum
 Web Protocol Standards

13.1 Environment and Safety


 ANSI T1.315: Voltage Levels for DC Powered Equipment Used in the Telecommunications
Environment (Hold-up time 10 msec)
 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 class 1.2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Storage
 ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 class 2.3: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Transportation
 ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 class 3.2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Stationary use at weather protected
locations
 ETSI EN 300 019-2-3 Class 3.1E: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 2-3: Specification of environmental
tests; Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
 ETSI EN 300-132-2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Power supply interface at the input to
telecommunications and datacom (ICT) equipment; Part 2: Operated by -48 V direct current (dc)
 ETSI EN 300 386 (class B) (Directive 2004/108/EC): Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum
Matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
requirements
 FCC CFR 47 part 15 subpart B: Radio Frequency Devices: Unintentional Radiators
 FTZ 1TR9:Electromagnetic Compatibility of Telecommunications Equipment

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-1


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Standards and references

 IEC/EN 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products


 IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 (Directive 2006/95/EC): Information Technology Equipment - Safety - General
Requirements
 ITU G.664: Optical Safety Procedures and Requirements for Optical Transport Systems
 RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC: Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment.
 Telcordia GR-63-CORE (Zone 4): Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical
Protection
 Telcordia GR-1089-CORE: Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for
Network Telecommunications Equipment
 WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC: Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

13.2 ETSI: European Telecommunications


Standards Institute
 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 class 1.2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 1-1: Classification of environmental
conditions; Storage
 ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 class 2.3: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 1-1: Classification of environmental
conditions; Transportation
 ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 class 3.2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 1-3: Classification of environmental
conditions; Stationary use at weather protected locations
 ETSI EN 300 019-2-3 Class 3.1E: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 2-3: Specification of environmental
tests; Stationary use at weather protected locations
 ETSI EN 300-132-2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Power supply interface at the input to
telecommunications and datacom (ICT) equipment; Part 2: Operated by -48 V direct current (dc)
 ETSI EN 300 386 (class B): Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements
 ETSI EN/IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products
 ETSI EN/IEC/UL 60950-1: Information Technology Equipment - Safety - General Requirements

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-2


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Standards and references

13.3 IEC: International Electrotechnical


Commission
 IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products
 IEC/EN/UL 60950-1: Information Technology Equipment - Safety - General Requirements
 IEC/ISO 9314-3: Information processing systems – Fiber distributed Data Interface (FDDI) – Part 3:
Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PMD)
 IEC/ISO 10589 Information Technology: Telecommunications and information exchange between
systems; Intermediate system to intermediate system intra-domain routing information exchange
protocol for use in conjunction with the protocol for providing the connectionless-mode network
service (ISO 8473)

13.4 IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic


Engineers
 IEEE 802.1ad: Virtual Bridged Terminal Area Networks—Revision—Amendment 4: Provider Bridges.
 IEEE 802.1ag: Virtual Bridged Terminal Area Networks Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault
Management.
 IEEE 802.1ax: Link Aggregation.
 IEEE 802.1D: Media access control (MAC) Bridges (Incorporates IEEE 802.1t and IEEE 802.1w).
 IEEE 802.1P: Traffic Class Expediting and Dynamic Multicast Filtering.
 IEEE 802.1Q: Virtual Bridged Terminal Area Networks—Revision.
 IEEE 802.1s: Multiple Spanning Trees.
 IEEE 802.1w: Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree.
 IEEE 802.3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and
Physical Layer Specifications.
 IEEE 802.3ad: Link Aggregation.
 IEEE 802.3ae: 10Gb/s Ethernet Task Force.
 IEEE 802.3ah: Ethernet in the First Mile (Link OAM).
 IEEE 802.3ba: 40Gb/s and 100Gb/s Ethernet Task Force.
 IEEE 802.3x: Full Duplex and Flow Control (incorporates DIX framing).
 IEEE 802.3z: Gigabit Task Force.
 IEEE 1588 v2: Standard for A Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement
and Control Systems.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-3


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Standards and references

13.5 IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force


 RFC 1493: Definition of Managed Objects for Bridges.
 RFC 1643: Ethernet-like Interfaces.
 RFC 1662: PPP in HDLC-Life Framing.
 RFC 1757: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base.
 RFC 1823: LDAP Application Program Interface (API).
 RFC 1901: Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2.
 RFC 2108: Definitions of Managed Objects for IEEE 802.3 Repeater Devices using SMIv2.
 RFC 2251: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3) [specification of the LDAP on-the-wire protocol].
 RFC 2252: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Attribute Syntax Definitions.
 RFC 2253: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): UTF-8 String Representation of Distinguished
Names.
 RFC 2254: The String Representation of LDAP Search Filters.
 RFC 2255: The LDAP URL Format.
 RFC 2256: A Summary of the X.500(96) User Schema for use with LDAPv3.
 RFC 2401: Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol.
 RFC 2409: Internet Key Exchange Protocol (IKE).
 RFC 2474: Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers.
 RFC 2597: Assured Forwarding PHB Group.
 RFC 2615: PPP over SONET/SDH.
 RFC 2665: Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like Interface Types.
 RFC 2674: Bridge MIB with VLAN/Traffic Classes/Multicast Extensions.
 RFC 2702: Requirements for Traffic Engineering Over MPLS.
 RFC 2737: Entity MIB (Version 2).
 RFC 2819: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base.
 RFC 2829: Authentication Methods for LDAP.
 RFC 2830: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Extension for Transport Layer Security.
 RFC 2863: Interfaces Group MIB.
 RFC 3014: Notification Log MIB.
 RFC 3031: Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture.
 RFC 3032: MPLS Label Stack Encoding.
 RFC 3246: An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior).
 RFC 3270: Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of Differentiated Services.
 RFC 3377: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Technical Specification.
 RFC 3411: SNMP Framework MIB.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-4


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Standards and references

 RFC 3414: SNMP User-Based SM MIB.


 RFC 3415: SNMP Vies-Based ACM MIB.
 RFC 3443: Time To Live (TTL) Processing in Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Networks.
 RFC 3812: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic Engineering (TE) Management Information
Base (MIB).
 RFC 3813: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Switching Router (LSR) Management
Information Base (MIB).
 RFC 3916: Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3).
 RFC 3985: Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Architecture.
 RFC 4090: Fast Reroute Extensions to RSVP-TE for LSP Tunnels.
 RFC 4125: Maximum Allocation Bandwidth Constraints Model for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic
Engineering.
 RFC 4126: Max Allocation with Reservation Bandwidth Constraints Model for Diffserv-aware MPLS
Traffic Engineering & Performance Comparisons.
 RFC 4252: The Secure Shell (SSH) Authentication Protocol.
 RFC 4253: The Secure Shell (SSH) Transport Layer Protocol.
 RFC 4254: The Secure Shell (SSH) Connection Protocol.
 RFC 4256: Generic Message Exchange Authentication for the Secure Shell Protocol (SSH).
 RFC 4379: Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures.
 RFC 4448: Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Ethernet over MPLS Networks.
 RFC 4553: Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) over Packet (SAToP)
 RFC 4762: Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS) Using Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Signaling.
 RFC 5086: Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation Service over Packet
Switched Network (CESoPSN)
 RFC 5254: Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3).
 RFC 5462: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Stack Entry: "EXP" Field Renamed to "Traffic
Class" Field.
 RFC 5659: An Architecture for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge.
 RFC 5960: MPLS-TP Data Plane Architecture.
 RFC 6073: Segmented Pseudowire.
 RFC 6427: MPLS Fault Management Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM)
 RFC 6378: MPLS Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) Linear Protection
 IETF Drafts:
 draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-ldp.
 draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-mcast-reqts.
 draft-ietf-magma-snoop.
 draft-ietf-mpls-rsvp-te-p2mp.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-5


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Standards and references

 draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-framework.
 draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-req.
 draft-ietf-pwe3-dynamic-ms-pw-14.
 draft-ietf-pwe3-ethernet-encap.
 draft-ietf-pwe3-ldp-aii-reachability-04.
 draft-martini-l2circuit-encap-mpls.
 draft-sajassi-l2vpn-vpls-multicast-congruency.
 draft-vasseur-mpls-backup-computation.

13.6 ISO: International Organization for


Standardization
 A2LA: Accredited Laboratory for Electrical and Mechanical Testing.
 ISO 9001: Quality Management System – Requirements.
 ISO/IEC 9314-3: Information processing systems – Fiber distributed Data Interface (FDDI) – Part 3:
Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PMD)
 ISO/IEC 10589 Information Technology: Telecommunications and information exchange between
systems; Intermediate system to intermediate system intra-domain routing information exchange
protocol for use in conjunction with the protocol for providing the connectionless-mode network
service (ISO 8473)
 ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems – Requirements With Guidance for Use.
 ISO 27001: Information Security Management Systems – Requirements.
 SOP LSN42-50-352 Optical GBE
 SOP LSN42-50-356 Optical Fast Ethernet
 SOP LSN42-50-357 Electrical Fast Ethernet
 SOP LSN42-50-362 Electrical GBE
 SOP LSN42-50-363 Optical 10GBE

13.7 ITU-T: International Telecommunication


Union
 ITU-T G.664: Optical Safety Procedures and Requirements for Optical Transport Systems
 ITU-T G.703: Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
 ITU-T G.704: Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44,736 kbit/s
hierarchical levels
 ITU-T G.781: Synchronization Layer Functions
 ITU-T G.812: Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization
networks

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-6


OPT9608 Installation and Maintenance Manual Standards and references

 ITU-T G.813: Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)


 ITU-T G.823: The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Based on the 2048 kbit/s
Hierarchy
 ITU-T G.824: Control of Jitter and Wander Within Digital Networks Which are Based on the 1544
kbit/s Hierarchy - Series G: Transmission Systems and Media, Digital Systems and Networks Digital
Transmission Systems - Digital Networks - Quality and Availability Targets
 ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361: Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks
 ITU-T G.8262/Y.1362: Timing characteristics of Synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock (EEC)
 ITU-T G.8264: Distribution of timing through packet networks

13.8 MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum


 MEF 2 Requirements and Framework for Ethernet Service Protection
 MEF 3 Circuit Emulation Service Definitions, Framework and Requirements in Metro Ethernet
Networks
 MEF 4 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic Framework
 MEF 6 Metro Ethernet Service Definitions Phase 1, Phase 3
 MEF 9 Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI
 MEF 10 Ethernet Services Attributes Definition Phase 2, Phase 3
 MEF11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework
 MEF 13 UNI Type 1 Implementation Agreement
 MEF 14 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management
 MEF 17 Service OAM Framework and Requirements
 MEF 18 Abstract Test Suite for Circuit Emulation Services
 MEF 22 Mobile Backhaul Implementation Agreement

13.9 North American Standards


 ANSI T1.315: Voltage Levels for DC Powered Equipment Used in the Telecommunications
Environment (Hold-up time 10 msec)
 ANSI X3.263: Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Token Ring Twisted Pair Physical Layer Medium
Dependent (TP-PMD)
 FCC CFR 47 part 15 subpart B: Radio Frequency Devices: Unintentional Radiators
 Telcordia GR-63-CORE (Zone 4): Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical
Protection
 Telcordia GR-1089-CORE: Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for
Network Telecommunications Equipment
 Telcordia GR-1244-Core: Clocks for the Synchronized Network: Common Generic Criteria
 UL/EN/IEC 60950-1: Information Technology Equipment - Safety - General Requirements

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-7

You might also like